BroadGate BG 20 Installation Operation A

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 206

Br oa dGa t e ® BG- 2 0

I n st a lla t ion, Ope r a t ion, a n d


M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Ve r sion 5

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1
BG-20 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual
V5
Catalog No: X37014
August 2008, 5th Edition

© Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2002-2008. All rights reserved worldwide.


This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Telecom Ltd. (“ECI Telecom”). BY OPENING THE
DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE
UNOPENED DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (INCLUDING
WRITTEN MATERIALS AND BINDERS OR OTHER CONTAINERS), TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU
OBTAINED THEM.
The information contained in the documentation and/or disk is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright,
patent, and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific agreement protecting ECI Telecom's
rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained in the documentation and/or
disk may be published, reproduced, or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the express prior
written permission of ECI Telecom. In addition, any use of this document, the documentation and/or the disk, or the
information contained therein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed, is strictly forbidden.
ECI Telecom reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or
specifications. Information supplied by ECI Telecom is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no
responsibility whatsoever is assumed by ECI Telecom for the use thereof, nor for the rights of third parties, which
may be affected in any way by the use and/or dissemination thereof.
Any representation(s) in the documentation and/or disk concerning performance of ECI Telecom product(s) are for
informational purposes only and are not warranties of product performance or otherwise, either express or implied.
ECI Telecom's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty
offered by ECI Telecom.
The documentation and/or disk is provided “AS IS” and may contain flaws, omissions, or typesetting errors. No
warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto, unless specifically undertaken in ECI Telecom's sales
contract or order confirmation. Information contained in the documentation and in the disk is periodically updated,
and changes will be incorporated in subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please notify ECI
Telecom. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
The documentation and/or disk and all information contained therein is owned by ECI Telecom and is protected by
all relevant copyright, patent, and other applicable laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must
treat the information contained in the documentation and disk as any other copyrighted material (for example, a
book or musical recording).
Other Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sell, or otherwise dispose of the documentation and disk, as
applicable. YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK OR
ANY COPY IN WHOLE OR PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE. ALL RIGHTS NOT
EXPRESSLY GRANTED ARE RESERVED BY ECI TELECOM.
All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective holders.
ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever
caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with this documentation and/or disk, the information contained
therein, its use, or otherwise. Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim
and/or demand regarding liability for indirect, special, incidental, or consequential loss or damage which may arise
in respect of the documentation and/or disk and/or the information contained therein, howsoever caused, even if
advised of the possibility of such damages.
This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Telecom Ltd. (“ECI Telecom”).
The end user hereby undertakes and acknowledges that they read the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines"
instructions and that such instructions were understood by them.
It is hereby clarified that ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage
whatsoever or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with you fulfilling and/or failed to fulfill
in whole or in part the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions.
Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim and/or demand regarding
liability for indirect, special, incidental or consequential loss or damage which may arise in respect of the
information contained therein howsoever caused even if advised of the possibility of such damages.
Con t e n t s
About This Manual ................................................................... vii
Overview ............................................................................................................ vii
Intended Audience ............................................................................................. vii
Document Organization ..................................................................................... viii
Document Conventions ..................................................................................... viii
Related Documentation ....................................................................................... ix
Obtaining Technical Documentation ....................................................................x
Technical Assistance........................................................................................... xi

Introduction.............................................................................. 1-1
BG-20 Platform Overview ................................................................................. 1-1
BG-20 Platform Options ................................................................................... 1-2

Before You Start ...................................................................... 2-1


Overview .......................................................................................................... 2-1
Outline of the Installation Procedure ................................................................ 2-2
Site Preparation ................................................................................................ 2-4
Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 2-7
Installation of BG-20 in Racks .......................................................................... 2-8
Preparing Cables and Fibers .......................................................................... 2-11
Work and Equipment Safety ........................................................................... 2-19
Protection Against ESD .................................................................................. 2-25

Equipment Installation ............................................................ 3-1


Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1
Preliminary Preparations .................................................................................. 3-2
Installation Sequence ....................................................................................... 3-2
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................... 3-5
Installation Options ........................................................................................... 3-6
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ..................................................................... 3-8
Installing the BG-20B Shelf in the Rack ......................................................... 3-29
Installing the BG-20E Shelf in the Rack ......................................................... 3-35
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the BG-20 Shelf ........................................ 3-42

Operation.................................................................................. 4-1
Commissioning Tests ....................................................................................... 4-1

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y i


Con t e n t s BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Maintenance ............................................................................. 5-1


Overview .......................................................................................................... 5-1
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials .............................................. 5-1
Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................... 5-2
Onsite Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 5-3
Troubleshooting Power Problems .................................................................... 5-4
Troubleshooting Using Component Indicators ................................................. 5-5
Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 5-22

Connection Data .................................................................... A-1


Overview .......................................................................................................... A-2
INF_20B/INF_20E DC Input Power Connectors .............................................. A-3
AC_CONV_20B/AC_CONV_20E AC Input Power Connectors ...................... A-3
MNG Ethernet Connector ................................................................................. A-4
T3/T4 Timing Connector ................................................................................... A-5
RS-232 Connector ............................................................................................ A-6
Orderwire Connector ........................................................................................ A-7
V.11 Overhead Connector ............................................................................... A-8
Alarms Connector............................................................................................. A-9
E1 Connectors on MXC20 ............................................................................. A-11
E1 Connectors on ME1_21 and ME1_42 ...................................................... A-15
Ethernet Interface Connectors ...................................................................... A-21
M345_3 Card Connection Data ..................................................................... A-21
P345_3E Card Connection Data .................................................................... A-21
PE1_63 Card Connection Data ..................................................................... A-21
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection Data ........................................................ A-22
SM_10E Card Connection Data ..................................................................... A-22
ICP_VF Connection Data .............................................................................. A-32
ICP_V24 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-33
ICP_V35 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-36

Rack Installation ..................................................................... B-1


Installing Equipment Racks .............................................................................. B-1
19" Rack Installation ......................................................................................... B-6

License Activation .................................................................. C-1


BG-20 Licensing Scheme .................................................................................C-1
Selecting the Proper BG-20 for Each Site ........................................................ C-3
Activating Licenses ...........................................................................................C-4

Index .......................................................................................... I-1

ii ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


List of Figu r e s
Figure 1-1: Typical BG-20 shelf ..................................................................................... 1-2
Figure 2-1: Typical installation of four BG-20 shelves in an ETSI 2200 rack .............. 2-10
Figure 2-2: Basic ESD warning symbol ...................................................................... 2-25
Figure 3-1: Typical installation of a single BG-20 shelf in a 2200 ETSI rack ................. 3-3
Figure 3-2: Typical installation of four BG-20 shelves ................................................... 3-7
Figure 3-3: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud ......................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-4: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes ....................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-5: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG ........................................... 3-12
Figure 3-6: RAP-BG shelf power cable grounding screws .......................................... 3-13
Figure 3-7: RAP-BG front cover removal ..................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-8: RAP-BG circuit breakers installation ......................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-9: BG shelf DC input power connector pin functions ..................................... 3-15
Figure 3-10: Connection of DC power cables to the RAP-100 ................................... 3-17
Figure 3-11: Connection of the BG-30B DC power cable ........................................... 3-18
Figure 3-12: Threading optical fibers in the FST......................................................... 3-20
Figure 3-13: Attaching rack mounting brackets to the ODF ......................................... 3-22
Figure 3-14: ODF front panel ....................................................................................... 3-22
Figure 3-15: ODF open view ........................................................................................ 3-23
Figure 3-16: ODF fiber routes ...................................................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-17: Installing ICP_MCP30 in the rack ............................................................ 3-26
Figure 3-18: Installing SM_10E ICPs in the rack ......................................................... 3-27
Figure 3-19: Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack .............................................. 3-28
Figure 3-20: Installing the rail stiffeners in the rack ..................................................... 3-30
Figure 3-21: Installing a power module in the BG-20B ................................................ 3-32
Figure 3-22: Installing a Dslot module in the BG-20B .................................................. 3-33
Figure 3-23: Installing an SFP module in the BG-20B ................................................. 3-34
Figure 3-24: Installing the BG-20E on the BG-20B ...................................................... 3-37
Figure 3-25: Installing the power module on the BG-20E ............................................ 3-38
Figure 3-26: Installing an extension card on the BG-20E ............................................ 3-39
Figure 3-27: Installing a traffic module on the SM_10E ............................................... 3-41
Figure 5-1: Inserting an SFP transceiver into an XIO30 module ................................. 5-28
Figure A-1: DC input power connectors, pin functions .................................................. A-3
Figure A-2: AC input power connectors ........................................................................ A-3
Figure A-3: Ethernet connectors, pin identification ........................................................ A-4
Figure A-4: T3/T4 connector, pin identification .............................................................. A-5

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y iii


List of Figu r e s BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Figure A-5: RS-232 overhead connectors, pin identification ......................................... A-6


Figure A-6: RS-232 overhead cable .............................................................................. A-6
Figure A-7: RS-232 overhead cable label ...................................................................... A-7
Figure A-8: OW connector, pin identification ................................................................. A-7
Figure A-9: V.11 connector, pin identification ................................................................ A-8
Figure A-10: Alarms connector, pin identification ........................................................ A-10
Figure A-11: E1 connectors for MXC20, pin identification ........................................... A-11
Figure A-12: E1 connectors for ME1_21 and ME1_42, pin identification .................... A-15
Figure A-13: SM_10E traffic module connector, pin identification ............................... A-22
Figure A-14: 25-pin D-type male connector, pin identification ..................................... A-33
Figure A-15: 9-pin D-type male connector, pin identification ....................................... A-35
Figure A-16: M34 female connector, pin identification ................................................. A-36
Figure B-1: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks .............................................................. B-3
Figure B-2: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks ................................................... B-4
Figure B-3: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead
tray (2200 mm rack) ....................................................................................................... B-5
Figure B-4: Example of an approved European 19” rack .............................................. B-6
Figure C-1: BG-20 License Label.................................................................................. C-3

iv ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


List of Ta ble s
Table 1-1: BG-20B modules........................................................................................... 1-3
Table 1-2: BG-20E modules........................................................................................... 1-4
Table 1-3: SM_10E traffic modules ................................................................................ 1-5
Table 2-1: Typical BG-20 equipment installation sequence .......................................... 2-2
Table 2-2: Environmental requirements ......................................................................... 2-5
Table 2-3: Equipment dimensions ................................................................................. 2-5
Table 2-4: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools ............................................... 2-7
Table 2-5: Traffic cables mating connector data .......................................................... 2-16
Table 2-6: Optical fibers and mating connector data ................................................... 2-18
Table 2-7: Circuit breaker data.................................................................................... 2-21
Table 2-8: LC transceivers laser information STM-4SFP ............................................ 2-23
Table 2-9: LC transceivers laser information STM-1 SFP ........................................... 2-24
Table 2-10: LC transceivers laser information STM-16 SFP ....................................... 2-24
Table 3-1: Outline of typical BG-20B equipment installation sequence ......................... 3-4
Table 4-1: Card and module inventory ........................................................................... 4-3
Table 4-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks .................................................... 4-4
Table 4-3: Measured optical levels ................................................................................ 4-5
Table 4-4: 2 Mbps tests.................................................................................................. 4-7
Table 4-5: 34 Mbps tests................................................................................................ 4-7
Table 4-6: 45 Mbps tests................................................................................................ 4-8
Table 4-7: SDH tests ...................................................................................................... 4-8
Table 4-7: Traffic stability test time intervals ................................................................ 4-11
Table 4-8: Throughput and latency test results............................................................ 4-15
Table 4-9: Frame loss-rate test results ........................................................................ 4-17
Table 5-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks ........................................... 5-2
Table 5-2: Troubleshooting power problems ................................................................. 5-4
Table 5-3: General troubleshooting procedures for BG-20B/BG-20C power-on ........... 5-6
Table 5-4: General troubleshooting procedures for MXC20 .......................................... 5-9
Table 5-5: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins ......... 5-11
Table 5-6: Troubleshooting procedures for M345_3 cards .......................................... 5-13
Table 5-7: Troubleshooting procedures for ME1_21/ME1_21H/ME1_42/
ME1_42H cards ........................................................................................................... 5-14
Table 5-8: Troubleshooting procedures for SMD1/SMD1H/OMS4B/OMS4H
cards............................................................................................................................. 5-15
Table 5-9: General troubleshooting procedures for MEoP_4 cards ............................ 5-16

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y v


List of Ta ble s BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table 5-10: General troubleshooting procedures for extended cards


PE1_63/P345_3E/SM_10E/ESW_2G_8F_E) .............................................................. 5-17
Table 5-11: Special troubleshooting procedures for P345_3E cards .......................... 5-18
Table 5-12: Special troubleshooting procedures for ESW_2G_8F_E cards ............... 5-19
Table 5-13: General troubleshooting procedures for daughterboards on
SM_10E cards .............................................................................................................. 5-20
Table 5-14: Special troubleshooting procedures for SM_EOP daughterboards.......... 5-20
Table 5-15: Special troubleshooting procedures for OW box ...................................... 5-21
Table A-1: Connectors reference ................................................................................... A-2
Table A-2: Ethernet connector, pin assignment ............................................................. A-4
Table A-3: T3/T4 connector, pin identification ............................................................... A-5
Table A-4: RS-232 connectors, pin assignment ............................................................ A-7
Table A-5: OW connector, pin assignment .................................................................... A-8
Table A-6: V.11 overhead connector, pin assignment ................................................... A-8
Table A-7: Alarms connector, pin assignment ............................................................. A-10
Table A-8: 1-11 E1 connector (lower), pin assignment ................................................ A-11
Table A-9: 12-21 E1 connector (upper), pin assignment ............................................. A-13
Table A-10: ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P2), pin assignment ............................. A-16
Table A-11: ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P1), pin assignment ............................. A-18
Table A-12: SM_10E SM_FXO_8 and SM_FXS_8 connector, pin assignment .......... A-23
Table A-13: SM_10E SM_EM_24W6E connector, pin assignment ............................. A-24
Table A-14: SM_10E SM_V35E connector, pin assignment ....................................... A-26
Table A-15: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 8 x V.24
transparent without controls mode ............................................................................... A-27
Table A-16: SM_V24E connector, pin assignment ...................................................... A-28
Table A-17: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 2 x V.24
synchronous with controls mode .................................................................................. A-30
Table A-18: SM_10E SM_CODIR_4E connector, pin assignment .............................. A-31
Table A-19: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving
SM_EM_24W6E ........................................................................................................... A-32
Table A-20: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving
SM_CODIR_4E ............................................................................................................ A-33
Table A-21: ICP_V24 synchronous V.24 25-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-34
Table A-22: ICP_V24 asynchronous V.24 9-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-35
Table A-23: ICP_V24 transparent V.24 9-pin D-type connector,
pin assignment ............................................................................................................. A-36
Table A-23: ICP_V35 M34 female connector, pin assignment .................................... A-37

vi ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


Abou t Th is M a n u a l

I n this chapter:
Overview .......................................................................................................... vii
Intended Audience ............................................................................................ vii
Document Organization ................................................................................... viii
Document Conventions ................................................................................... viii
Related Documentation ................................................................................... viii
Obtaining Technical Documentation .................................................................. x
Technical Assistance ......................................................................................... xi

Ove r vie w
The BroadGate® (BG) BG-30 Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual
(IOMM) describes how to install BG-30 shelves and how to install and replace
hardware components, including cards, modules, and accessories.

I nt e nde d Audie nce


The BG-30 IOMM is intended for installation and other qualified service
personnel responsible for installing the platform and its accessories.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y vii


Abou t Th is M a n u a l BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

D ocu m e n t Or ga n iza t ion


This manual contains the following information:
 Installation
 Operation
 Maintenance
 Additional functionality

D ocum e nt Conve nt ions


When applicable, this manual uses the following conventions.

Convention Indicates Example


Bold Names of windows, dialog In the Alarms menu...
boxes, menus, buttons and
most other GUI elements;
commands; user-typed
information
Menu > Option Selection from a menu, or Select Update > View
leading to another Objects
command
Italics New terms and emphasized Examples in text
text
Borders around text Notes, cautions, and See examples below
warnings

NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying


information, specific instructions, commentary, sidelights, or
interesting points of information.

CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure


to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or
loss of information.

WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure


to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life.

viii ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Abou t Th is M a n u a l
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

LASER WARNING: Invisible laser radiation can be emitted


from the aperture ports of amplifier circuit packs when no
fiber cable is connected. Avoid exposure and do not stare into
open apertures to avoid permanent eye damage.

ESD: Text set off in this manner indicates information on


how to avoid discharge of static electricity and subsequent
damage to the unit.

TIP: Text set off in this manner includes helpful information


and handy hints that can make your task easier..

IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents essential


information you must pay attention to.

Re la t e d D ocu m e n t a t ion
The following publications may be of assistance to you in the installation and
commissioning processes. Some of these documents present information
supplied in this installation manual in greater or lesser detail.
 BroadGate Product Line General Description
 BroadGate Product Line System Specifications
 BroadGate EMS-BGF User Manual
 BroadGate LCT-BGF User Manual
 BroadGate BG-20 Reference Manual
 LightSoft® Network Management System User Manual
 IEC Publication 825 - Laser Safety Requirements

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y ix


Abou t Th is M a n u a l BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Obt a inin g Te chnica l


D ocu m e n t a t ion
To obtain technical documentation related to the BG-20 or any other ECI
Telecom product, please contact:
ECI Telecom Ltd.
Documentation Department
30 Hasivim St.
Petach Tikva 49130
Israel
Fax: +972-3-9268060
Email: on.documentation@ecitele.com

x ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Abou t Th is M a n u a l
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Te chn ica l Assist a n ce


The configuration, installation, and operation of the BG-20 and its operation in
a network are highly specialized processes. Due to the different nature of each
installation, some planning aspects may not be covered in this manual.
If you have questions or concerns about your network design or if you require
installation personnel to perform the actual installation process, ECI Telecom
maintains a staff of design engineers and highly trained field service personnel.
The services of this group are available to customers at any time.
If you are interested in obtaining design assistance or a network installation
plan from ECI Telecom's Customer Support team, contact your ECI Telecom
sales representative. With any support related issues, technical or logistic,
please contact the ECI Telecom Customer Support center at your location. If
you are not familiar with that location, please contact our central customer
support center action line at:
Telephone +972-3-9266000

Telefax +972-3-9266370

Email on.support@ecitele.com

ECI Telecom's XDM® and BroadGate® product lines are


certified to comply with MEF9 and MEF14 standards.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y xi


Abou t Th is M a n u a l BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

x ii ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


1
I n t r oduct ion

I n this chapter:
BG-20 Platform Overview............................................................................... 1-1
BG-20 Platform Options .................................................................................. 1-2

BG- 2 0 Pla t for m Ove r vie w


ECI Telecom’s BG-20 miniature MSPP delivers a cost-effective and affordable
mix of Ethernet, SDH, PDH, and PCM services, resulting in new
revenue-generating opportunities. It offers a wide variety of features and
benefits, including:
 Ultra-high scalability based on coupling the BG-20E to the BG-20B to
make a build-as-you-grow® solution.
 Gradual capacity expansion based on service provisioning needs. More
STM-1 interfaces can be added very conveniently and ADM-1s can be
upgraded to ADM-4s without affecting traffic. This highly adaptable and
flexible architecture translates into significant savings in both operational
and capital expenditures (OPEX and CAPEX).
 Provides a carrier class Ethernet-over-WAN/MAN solution (including
Ethernet over SDH and Ethernet over PDH) with SDH reliability, security,
and management of data services.
 Sublambda grooming for high utilization of existing fiber and top
efficiency in transmission of different types of services.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 1-1


I n t r odu ct ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

 PCM service interfaces and 1/0 digital cross-connect functions to facilitate


the construction and maintenance of various private networks.
 Multi-ADM and cross-connect functionality, ideal for deployment in
flexible network topologies like ring, mesh, and star.
 Compactness and resiliency, perfectly suited for both indoor and outdoor
enclosures. Due to its extended operating temperature range, it is also most
suitable for harsh environmental conditions.
For a detailed description of the BG-20 platform, see the BroadGate Product
Line General Description.

Figure 1-1: Typical BG-20 shelf

BG- 2 0 Pla t for m Opt ion s


The BG-20 is an extremely versatile platform consisting of the basic shelf (BG-
20B) and an optional expansion shelf (BG-20E). The BG-20 has the following
four main configuration options:
 BG-20B_L1: an ADM-1 or ADM-4 that can provide 21 x E1 and 6 x FE L1
interfaces, and an additional 21/42 x E1, 3 x E3/DS-3, 2 x STM-1, or
1 x STM-4 interfaces
 BG-20B_L2: an ADM-1 or ADM-4 that can provide 21 x E1 and 6 x FE L2
interfaces, and an additional 21/42 x E1, 3 x E3/DS-3, 2 x STM-1, or
1 x STM-4 interfaces
 BG-20C_L2M: an ADM-1 that can provide 21 x E1 and 2 x FE L2 (MPLS
ready) interfaces, or expand from ADM-1 to ADM-4 or from 2x FE to 6x
FE (2 ports granularity) by License permission
 BG-20B_L1 plus BG-20E: provides all the interfaces of the BG-20B_L1,
plus additional E1, E3/DS-3, Ethernet L2, and PCM interfaces using the
BG-20E shelf

1-2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d I n t r odu ct ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

 BG-20B_L2 plus BG-20E: provides all the interfaces of the BG-20B_L2,


plus additional E1, E3/DS-3, Ethernet L2, and PCM interfaces using the
BG-20E shelf
 BG-20B_L2M: an ADM-1 or ADM-4 that can provide 21 x E1 and 6 x FE
L2 (MPLS ready) interfaces, and an additional 21/42 x E1, 3 x E3/DS-3, 2
x STM-1, or 1 x STM-4 interfaces
 BG-20B_L2M plus BG-20E: provides all the interfaces of the BG-
20B_L2M, plus additional E1, E3/DS-3, Ethernet L2, and PCM interfaces
using the BG-20E shelf
Based on a modular design, the BG-20 gives you many system configuration
options and offers a true pay-as-you-grow™ solution.
The following table lists the modules supported in V5 that can be configured in
each slot in the BG-20B.

Table 1-1: BG-20B modules

Name Description MS DS PS
1 2
MXC20 L1 Cross-connect, timing control, 21 x E1 , 6 x √
FE L1, and 2 x STM-1/4 interface card
MXC20_L2 3 Cross-connect, timing control, 21 x E1 4, 6 x √
FE L2, and 2 x STM-1/4 interface card
MXC20_L2M 5 Cross-connect, timing control, 21 x E1 6, 6 x √
FE L2 (MPLS ready), and 2 x STM-1/4
interface card
SMD1 2 x STM-1o/e module √
SMD1H 2 x STM-1o/e module √
OMS4B 1 x STM-4 module √
OMS4H 1 x STM-4 module √
7
ME1_42 42 x E1 module √
ME1_42H 42 x E1 module 8 √
9
ME1_21 21 x E1 module √

1
Requires ordering the BG-20B-L1 unit.
2
The BG-20B basic unit and Dslot E1 modules only support balanced E1 interfaces. For unbalanced E1 interfaces,
an external balancedtounbalanced conversion unit, the xDDF-21, should be used.
3
Requires ordering the BG-20B-L2 unit.
4
The BG-20B basic unit and Dslot E1 modules only support balanced E1 interfaces. For unbalanced E1 interfaces,
an external balancedtounbalanced conversion unit, the xDDF-21, should be used.
5
Requires ordering the BG-20B-L2M unit.
6
The BG-20B basic unit and Dslot E1 modules only support balanced E1 interfaces. For unbalanced E1 interfaces,
an external balancedtounbalanced conversion unit, the xDDF-21, should be used.
7
The BG-20B basic unit and Dslot E1 modules only support balanced E1 interfaces. For unbalanced E1 interfaces,
an external balancedtounbalanced conversion unit, the xDDF-21, should be used.
8
The BG-20B basic unit and Dslot E1 modules only support balanced E1 interfaces. For unbalanced E1 interfaces,
an external balancedtounbalanced conversion unit, the xDDF-21, should be used.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 1-3


I n t r odu ct ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Name Description MS DS PS
10
ME1_21H 21 x E1 module √
M345_3 3 x DS-3/E3 module √
MEoP_4 4 x FE module providing EoP L1 processing √
INF_20-B Power filter unit (-48 VDC) √
AC_CONV-20B Power conversion unit (110/220 VAC) √

All MXC20_L1, MXC20_L2, and MXC20_L2M have additional options,


based on the licenses purchased. The same hardware with different licenses can
compose different configurations, based on a combination of the following:
 ADM-1 or ADM-4
 0-6 activated FE interfaces
The BG-20 licensing scheme provides a pay-as-you-grow™ solution with a
very fine granularity.
The following table lists the modules supported in V5 that can be configured in
each slot in the BG-20E.

Table 1-2: BG-20E modules

Name Description ES1 ES2 ES3 PS


11
PE1_63 63 x E1 card √ √ √
P345_3E 3 x DS-3/E3 card √ √ √
S1_4 4 x STM-1o/e module √ √ √
SM_10E DXC1/0 and PCM interfaces card √ √ √
(24-channel N × 64 Kbps)
ESW_2G_8F_E Ethernet card with metro L2 switch √ √ √
(16 FE EoS WAN interfaces +
8 x 10/100BaseT +
2 x 1000Base-SX/LX)
INF_20E Power filter unit (-48 VDC) √
AC_CONV-20E Power conversion unit √
(90-240 VAC)

9
The BG-20B basic unit and Dslot E1 modules only support balanced E1 interfaces. For unbalanced E1 interfaces,
an external balancedtounbalanced conversion unit, the xDDF-21, should be used.
10
The BG-20B basic unit and Dslot E1 modules only support balanced E1 interfaces. For unbalanced E1
interfaces, an external balancedtounbalanced conversion unit, the xDDF-21, should be used.
11
The PE1_63 supports only balanced E1 interfaces. For unbalanced E1 interfaces, an external
balancedtounbalanced conversion unit, the xDDF-21, should be used.

1-4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d I n t r odu ct ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

The SM_10E is a complex card consisting of a base card and up to three traffic
modules that provide additional flexibility for functionality as well as the
number of supported interfaces. The following table lists the traffic modules
supported in V5 that can be configured in each module slot of the SM_10E.
More types of Dslot modules, extension cards, and SM_10E traffic modules
will be supported in future versions.

Table 1-3: SM_10E traffic modules

Name Description MS1# MS2# MS3#


SM_FXO_8E Eight FXO channels √ √ √
SM_FXS_8E Eight FXS or FXD channels √ √ √
SM_EM_24W6E Six 2W or 4W E&M √ √ √
channels
SM_V24E  V.24 with three modes: √ √ √
 Transparent (eight
channels)
or
 Async with controls
(four channels)
or
 Sync with controls (two
channels)
SM_V35E 2 x V.35 channels √ √ √
SM_EOP 2 x FE module providing √ √ √
EoP L1 processing
SM_CODIR_4E 4 x codirectional 64 Kbps √ √ √
channels (G.703)

More types of Dslot modules, extension cards, and SM_10E traffic modules
will be supported in future versions.

NOTE:
 It is recommended that the BG-20 shelf be installed in ECI
Telecom’s ETSI rack (2200 mm or 2600 mm). It can also
be installed in standard ETSI and US 23” racks with filters
or in 19” racks without filters, which have been approved
by ECI Telecom.
 A bandwidth upgrade from ADM-1 to ADM-4 or the
activation of any of the six Ethernet ports in BG-20B
requires the purchase of an appropriate license.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 1-5


I n t r odu ct ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

1-6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


2
Be for e You St a r t

I n this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Outline of the Installation Procedure ............................................................... 2-2
Site Preparation................................................................................................ 2-4
Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 2-7
Installation of BG-20 in Racks ........................................................................ 2-8
Preparing Cables and Fibers .......................................................................... 2-11
Work and Equipment Safety.......................................................................... 2-19
Protection Against ESD ................................................................................. 2-25

Ove r vie w
This chapter contains important information that will help you carry out a safe
and trouble-free installation.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-1


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Out line of t he I nst a lla t ion


Pr oce dur e
The main steps involved in the installation of BG-20 equipment are described
in the following table. Consult your site installation plans for specific details.

Table 2-1: Typical BG-20 equipment installation sequence

No. Task Reference


1 Prepare the installation site and check the Before You Start (on page 2-1)
physical location, environmental compliance,
and availability of power sources.
2 Prepare power, alarm, management, and Before You Start (on page 2-1)
transmission cables at the installation site. and Equipment Installation (on
page 3-1)
3 Route the required power, alarm, Equipment Installation (on
management, and transmission cables to the page 3-1)
intended BG-20 equipment location.
4 If required, install the equipment racks. Equipment Installation (on
page 3-1)
5 Mark the location of each BG-20B shelf, BG- Equipment Installation (on
20E shelf, and relevant accessories (BG-OW page 3-1)
box, Fiber Storage Tray [FST], Optical
Distribution Frame [ODF], PCM
Interconnection Panels [ICPs], and Digital
Distribution Frame [DDF]) on each rack, in
accordance with the site installation plan.
Notes:
 For each BG-20B, it is recommended that
you leave at least 4 U of space above the
BG-20B shelf to enable future installation
of the BG-20E shelf.
 The BG-20B can only support balanced
E1 interfaces directly. For unbalanced
E1s, the xDDF-21 patch panel must be
configured, which provides conversion
between balanced and unbalanced E1s for
21 x E1.
 When PCM interfaces are provided by the
SM_10E, the corresponding ICPs can be
installed in order to simplify installation
and connection to customer termination
equipment.
6 When applicable, install the EMS-BGF EMS-BGF Installation Manual
management station.

2-2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

No. Task Reference


7 Install the Rack Alarm Panel (RAP) and other Installing the RAP-BG, or
equipment needed in each rack. Installing the RAP-100 (on
page 3-16)
8 Install the BG-20B shelves in the appropriate Installing the BG-20B Shelf in
rack. the Rack (on page 3-29)
9 For each BG-20B shelf where optical modules Grounding the BG-20B Shelf
are used, install an FST under the BG-20B (on page 3-31)
shelf and route the optical fibers to the FST.
NOTE: Even if you are not currently
installing an FST, it is recommended that you
leave enough space beneath the BG-20B shelf
to enable future installation.
10 Install the prescribed power-feeding module in Installing Power Modules in
the BG-20B shelf. the BG-20B (on page 3-32)
11 Install the prescribed Dslot module in the Installing Dslot Modules (on
BG-20B shelf, where relevant. page 3-33)

12 Install the SFP modules. Installing SFP Modules (on


page 3-34)
13 When applicable, install the BG-OW box.
14 When applicable, install the BG-20E and Installing the BG-20E Shelf in
relevant accessories, including: the Rack (on page 3-35)
 The BG-20E shelf on the BG-20B
 The prescribed power-feeding module in
the BG-20E shelf
 The prescribed extension cards in the
BG-20E shelf
 The xDDF-21 units for PE1_63, if needed
 ICPs for the SM_10E, if needed

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-3


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

No. Task Reference


15 Depending on the modules or cards in your Equipment Installation (on
BG-20 shelf: page 3-1)
 Route the PDH electrical cables from the
DDF to the E1 interfaces on the BG-20B,
ME1_21, ME1_42, and PE1_63 front
panel, the E3/DS-3 interfaces on the
M345_3 and P345_3E front panel, and
STM-1e interfaces on the STM-1
electrical SFPs.
 Route the data cables to the FE interfaces
on the BG-20B, MEoP_4, and
ESW_2G_8F_E front panel.
 If ICPs are installed, route the special
cables to connect ICPs and their relevant
SM_10E modules, and route the voice and
data cables from the VDF to the interfaces
on the ICP panel. If ICPs are not installed,
route the voice and data cables from the
VDF to the interfaces on the front panel
of the SM_10E module.
Note: The DDF can be installed on the same
rack as the BG-20 shelf, or on a different rack.
16 Connect management cables between the Equipment Installation (on
equipment installed in the rack and the page 3-1)
management station.
17 Connect power cables from the RAP panel to Equipment Installation (on
each BG-20B and BG-20E installed in the page 3-1)
rack. Connect alarm monitoring cables from
the RAP panels to each BG-20B installed in
the rack.

Sit e Pr e pa r a t ion
Perform a preliminary survey of the installation site, taking into consideration
the following issues:
 System environmental requirements
 Physical location of the BG-20 shelves
 Location of power sources
 Types of interfaces used at the site (optical, electrical, management, alarm
monitoring, and so on)
 Work and equipment safety requirements

2-4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Environm ental Requirem ents


The environmental conditions listed in the following table apply to BG-20
equipment and must be ensured at the installation site.

Table 2-2: Environmental requirements

Parameter Compliance requirements


Electromagnetic interference EN 55022/94, EN 50082-1/92
Temperature ETSI ETS 300-19-2-3 Test Spec. T3.1

Physical Location

WARNING: BG-20 shelves are intended for installation in


restricted-access areas only.

Be for e you st a r t :
Choose the physical location of the BG-20 shelves, taking the following
aspects into consideration:
1. Equipment dimensions (see the following table).
2. Required floor loading capability: 100 kg for a typical eight-shelf
installation.
3. Routing requirements for grounding, power, alarm monitoring, and
management cables, and optical fibers. To ensure convenient access to
cables and fibers, it is recommended, whenever possible, to use overhead
cable ladders to bring the cables/fibers to the top of each rack.
4. When a network management station, for example, the EMS-BGF, is
installed on the site, consider the method of connection to the local network
management station and the maximum allowed distance.

Table 2-3: Equipment dimensions

Equipment Height Width (mm) Depth (mm) Max.


type (mm) weight (kg)
BG-20B 44 465 243 5
BG-20E 88 465 243 8
RAP-BG 88 440 150 4
FST 44.5 440 240 5

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-5


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Equipment Height Width (mm) Depth (mm) Max.


type (mm) weight (kg)
ODF 44.5 440 240 8
xDDF-21 44.5 440 150 1.5
ICP_VF 44 465 140 1.5
ICP_VF 44 465 140 1.5
ICP_V24 44 465 140 1.5
ICP_V35 44 465 140 1.5

Pow er Sources
BG-20 shelves can be powered by DC sources complying with the applicable
sections of ETSI 300 132-2 and the SELV or TNV requirements of EN 60950.
The nominal supply voltage is -48 VDC (positive-lead grounded). However,
the allowed supply voltage range is -40 VDC to -75 VDC. Power feeding for
the BG-20B shelf and the BG-20E shelf are separate. For redundancy, two
separate DC power sources should be available. In the DC power supply, the
maximum power consumption of the BG-20B is 50 W and the maximum
power consumption of the BG-20E is 130 W.
BG-20 shelves can also be powered directly from standard AC power outlets.
The nominal AC supply voltage is 220 V/50 Hz or 110 V/60 Hz. The allowed
range is 94 VAC to 240 VAC. In the AC power supply, power feeding for the
BG-20B and BG-20E shelves is separate. Because of the efficiency of the
AC/DC conversion in the AC power supply, the maximum power consumption
of the BG-20B is 62.5 W and the maximum power consumption of the BG-20E
is 162.5 W.

NOTE: If the planned power consumption of the equipment


installed in the shelf is 80% or more of the maximum listed
value, it is recommended to consult ECI Telecom Customer
Support.

2-6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Tools a nd Te st Equipm e nt
No special-purpose tools beyond a standard technician’s toolbox are required
for the installation of BG-20 shelves.
Since traffic cables can be prepared on site, suitable tool kits should be
available. They include tools for the assembly of coaxial cables (see the list of
recommended tools in the following table) and tools for the preparation of
optical patch cords.

Table 2-4: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools

No. Name Description


1 Stripper DIN 1.0/2.3
2 Center contact crimp tool (blue) DIN 1.0/2.3
3 Crimp tool, outer DIN 1.0/2.3
4 Cable stripper ---
5 Nipper (cutter for center contact) ---
6 Die for NCX1 ---

Cleaning Optical Connectors


When handling optical fibers, clean the optical connectors using the standard
cleaning kits recommended by the optical connector manufacturers.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-7


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nst a lla t ion of BG- 2 0 in Ra ck s

I nstallation Plan
This section provides guidelines for planning the installation of BG-20 shelves
and ancillary equipment in racks.
We recommend installation in ECI Telecom’s ETSI racks, which provide the
following advantages:
 Removable rear and side panels, enabling tidy leading and efficient
maintenance of all rack cables, including:
 PCM/El/E3/DS-3/STM-1e cables
 Control cables
 Power cables
 Data cables
 Voice frequency cables
 Timing cables
 Two ducts on the rack’s front rails for routing up to 200 optical fibers
 Open frame top and bottom, facilitating easy leading of cables from
suspension floors and/or ceiling ladders
 Front-door mountable for left or right opening
BG-20 equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or floating
floors, or suspended from overhead mountings.

2-8 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Typical BG- 2 0 I nstallation


For a typical installation of a BG-20 shelf in an ECI Telecom’s ETSI rack, see
Typical installation of a single BG-20 shelf in a 2200 ETSI rack. In this figure,
two BG-20 shelves are shown with the BG-20E and the other two shelves are
shown without the BG-20E.
In addition to the BG-20 itself, the equipment installed in the rack includes:
 One RAP installed at the top of the rack. The RAP is used to connect
external power and alarm monitoring lines (RAP-100 only) to the BG-20
shelves installed in the rack. The RAP fully supports up to four shelves
with dual power feeding or eight shelves with single power feeding. In
addition to the space needed for RAP installation, you must leave at least
50 mm of free space under the RAP for cable routing.

NOTE: The RAP-BG does not support alarm monitoring


lines.

 Fiber Storage Tray. A separate FST can be installed for each BG-20 with
optical modules. Each FST contains two storage reels, enabling the fiber to
be stored on the right or left side of the tray. Leave at least 50 mm of free
space between the BG-20 shelf and its FST, and another 50 mm free
between the FST and the next BG-20 shelf.
 BG-OW. An external box that adds an orderwire interface and functionality
to the BG-20. It can be installed on either the left or the right rail of the
rack. It should be installed in the most suitable place for convenient
operation.
 xDDF-21. When unbalanced E1 interfaces are needed, the xDDF-21 should
be installed with the BG-20. Each xDDF-21 can support 21 channels of E1.
The xDDF-21 can be installed anywhere on the same rack on which the
BG-20 shelf is installed, or on another rack.
 ICPs for the SM_10E, including ICP_VF, ICP_V24, and ICP_V35. When
PCM interfaces are provided by the SM_10E, the corresponding ICPs can
be installed in order to simplify installation and connection to customer
termination equipment. Each ICP can support one SM_10E traffic module.
ICPs can be installed anywhere on the same rack on which the BG-20 shelf
is installed, or on another rack.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-9


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I ntegrating BG- 2 0 Shelves and Other


Equipm ent in One Rack
BG-20 shelves and associated accessories may not occupy the entire rack.
Additional equipment may be installed in the remaining rack space, provided
that any heat generated by additional equipment can be efficiently dissipated,
and thermal isolation is provided between the various equipment units installed
in the same rack.
In the event of additional equipment being installed on the rack, contact ECI
Telecom’s Customer Support team for assistance.

Figure 2-1: Typical installation of four BG-20 shelves in an ETSI 2200 rack

2-10 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pr e pa r in g Ca ble s a nd Fibe r s
NOTE: This section provides information needed for
preparing cables and optical fibers. The necessary cables can
be ordered from ECI Telecom. For details, contact ECI
Telecom’s Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom sales
representative.

Be for e you st a r t :
The following main types of cables are required for installing the BG-20:
 Grounding Cables (on page 2-12)
 DC Power Cables (on page 2-12)
 AC Power Cable (on page 2-14)
 Alarm Cables (on page 2-14)
 Management Cables (on page 2-15)
 Timing (Clock) Cables (on page 2-15)
 Orderwire Cables (on page 2-15)
 Electric Traffic Cables (on page 2-16)
 Optical Fibers (on page 2-18)
Some of these cables are supplied by ECI Telecom as part of the BG-20
equipment, while others must be prepared on site or ordered separately from
ECI Telecom.
In the following sections, you will find information about the cables, as well as
information to enable the preparation of cables on site, where relevant. For
further details about the equipment connector types and cable wiring, see
Connection Data (on page A-1).

WARNING: When preparing cables, in particular power and


grounding cables, use only UL-listed components of the
specified types. Components must also comply with any
applicable national and local safety codes and regulations.

Only qualified trained personnel may be involved in the


preparation of the various cable types. Personnel must use
only approved procedures, in accordance with the applicable
workmanship practice.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-11


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Grounding Cables
Shelf grounding is achieved by connecting the shelf to the rack using rack
mounting brackets. Grounding is provided by contact when the unit is fastened
to the rack.
A reliable low-impedance connection must be provided using copper
conductors between the rack frame and the site grounding bus.
Make the connection between the rack grounding screw and the site grounding
bus with a 2 AWG (35 mm2) or thicker copper lead with yellow/green
insulation, in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations.
Route grounding conductors along the shortest possible route. Treat the bare
portion of the conductor with antioxidant and connect a listed two-hole
compression lug. If the lug is not plated, polish it until it has a bright finish and
coat it with antioxidant before connecting it to the frame of the rack. Do not
mix different types of metal conductors.

DC Pow er Cables
DC power cables should be prepared on site. Two types of DC power cables
are needed:
 RAP input power cables
 Shelf power cables
ECI Telecom recommends the use of shielded power cables for DC power
connections, with the shields connected to the frame ground at the rack end
only.

RAP I n pu t Pow e r Ca ble s


The RAP input power cables are prepared on site. They connect input power
from the site power distribution subsystem to the DC input terminals of the
RAP.
Two input power cables are required for each rack, one for each source. The
cables must use copper leads complying with UL/ETSI recommendations. Use
a red lead for the positive conductor and a black lead for the negative
conductor. The RAP cable ends must be terminated in M6 cable lugs matching
the conductor gauge.

2-12 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

The recommended cable gauge is 25 mm2 or thicker. This gauge ensures that
the voltage drop across the rack power cable does not exceed 2 V, even for
cable runs of maximum 30 meters connected to a RAP and providing power to
multiple BG-20 shelves.
When the RAP is used to provide power to a single BG-20 shelf, lower-lead
gauges may be used, as follows:
 For runs not exceeding 20 meters, it is sufficient to use 10 m2 copper leads
 For runs not exceeding 30 meters, it is sufficient to use 16 m2 copper leads

Sh e lf Pow e r Ca ble s
Two 12 AWG cables, supplied by ECI Telecom, are used to connect the input
power from the rack RAP unit to each POWER IN connector on the INF_20B
module of each BG-20B shelf installed in the rack.
If the BG-20E is installed, ECI Telecom can supply one of two power cable
options:
 Two additional 12 AWG cables to connect the input power from the rack
RAP unit to each POWER IN connector on the INF_20E module. This
option requires separate circuit breaker positions for the BG-20E and the
BG-20B.
 Two 12 AWG cables, each with two connectors on the BG-20B and BG-
20E sides, to connect one input power circuit breaker from the rack RAP to
one POWER IN connector of the INF_20B and one POWER IN of the
INF_20E. This option allows the use of the same circuit breaker position
for both shelves.
If the BG-OW is installed, an additional 12 AWG cable, supplied by ECI
Telecom, is used to connect the input power from the rack RAP unit to the
POWER IN connector on the front panel of the BG-OW, for each BG-OW box
installed in the rack.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-13


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

NOTE:
 For each BG-20 unit without a BG-20E, one shelf DC
power cable is needed when power feeding is
nonredundant, and two shelf DC power cables are needed
when power feeding is redundant. For each BG-20 unit
with a BG-20E, two shelf DC power cables or one dual-
headed shelf DC power cable are needed when power
feeding is nonredundant, and four shelf DC power cables
or two double-headed shelf DC power cables are needed
when power feeding is redundant.
 The BG-OW only supports DC power feeding and does
not support redundant power feeding. For each BG-OW,
one shelf DC power cable is needed.

AC Pow er Cable
An AC power cable is provided, fully prepared with the system. One AC power
cable is required for a BG-20 shelf without the BG-20E, and two AC power
cables are required for a BG-20 shelf with the BG-20E.
The AC power cable comes with an AC male connector for connection to the
AC source outlet. Replace the AC male connector if it is not suitable for the
local AC source.

Alarm Cables
Alarm cables used within BG-20 equipment are included in the shipment
according to the site specifications.
The alarm indications are carried by the shelf alarm indication cable. One shelf
alarm indication cable is required for each BG-20 shelf installed in the rack.
This cable connects between the ALARMS connector on the BG-20B and one
of the ALARMS connectors on the RAP (RAP-100 only). Cable length is 2.0
m.

NOTE: There are no ALARMS connectors on the RAP-BG.

2-14 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Managem ent Cables


Out-of-band management traffic is connected to a BG-20 shelf via the RJ-45
(MNG) connector located on the front panel of the BG-20B.
The MNG Ethernet connector is wired as a 10BaseT station port for direct
connection through an RJ-45-to-RJ-45 straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT
Ethernet hub.
Suitable standard Ethernet station cables are available from many sources.
Cables of Category 5 or better must be used. In all cases, the length of the
cables must not exceed the maximum recommended for the cable type and hub
port in use (up to a few dozen meters).

Tim ing ( Clock) Cables


The BG-20 shelf uses an RJ-45 connector on the BG-20B front panel that
integrates the two timing reference interfaces (2 x T3 and 2 x T4). A
multitwisted-pair cable with an RJ-45 connector (supplied by ECI Telecom) is
used to connect timing signals from the BG-20 to the site timing reference
distribution subsystems, if it has balanced (120 Ω) G.703 interfaces.

If the site timing reference distribution subsystem has unbalanced (75 Ω) G.703
interfaces, an adapter with coaxial cables that provides balanced-to-unbalanced
conversion (supplied by ECI Telecom) should be configured.

Orderw ire Cables


When the BG-OW is installed, a cable with RJ-45 connectors on both sides
(supplied by ECI Telecom) should be used to connect the OW interface on the
BG-20B front panel and the BG-NE connector on the BG-OW front panel.
Another cable with RJ-11 connectors on both sides (supplied by ECI Telecom)
should be used to connect the HANDSET connector on the BG-OW front panel
to the OW handset. These cables are delivered with the BG-OW.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-15


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Electric Traffic Cables


Some electric traffic cables can be prepared on site. The following table lists
the type of cables and mating connectors needed for each BG-20 traffic
interface type.

Table 2-5: Traffic cables mating connector data


Module or card Interface type Cable type Mating Connector at Qty/
connector other end module

BG-20B E1 balanced Multipair cable 50-pin SCSI Open 2


(2.048 Mbps) (2 x 11 120 Ω male
twisted pairs)
ME1_21 E1 balanced Multipair cable 68-pin VHDCI Open 1
(2.048 Mbps) (2 x 21 120 Ω female
twisted pairs)
ME1_42 E1 balanced Multipair cable 68-pin VHDCI Open 2
(2.048 Mbps) (2 x 21 120 Ω female
twisted pairs)
PE1_63 E1 balanced Multipair cable 68-pin VHDCI Open 3
(2.048 Mbps) (2 x 21 120 Ω female
twisted pairs)
BG-20B 12 E1 balanced Twin multipair 2 x 50-pin SCSI 2 x 50-pin SCSI 1
(2.048 Mbps) cable (2 x 21 male male
120 Ω twisted
pairs)

ME1_21 13 E1 balanced Multipair cable 68-pin VHDCI 2 x 50-pin SCSI 1


(2.048 Mbps) (2 x 21 120 Ω female male
twisted pairs)
ME1_42 14 2
15
PE1_63 3

xDDF-21 E1 unbalanced Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open (prepared 42


(2.048 Mbps) in the field)
BG-20B STM-1 electrical Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open (prepared 2/4
in the field)
SMD1 STM-1 electrical Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open (prepared 2/4
in the field)
S1_4 STM-1 electrical Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open (prepared 2/4/6/8
in the field)
M345_3 E3/DS-3 Coaxial cable DIN 1.0/2.3 Open (prepared 6
(34/45 Mbps) in the field)

P345_3 6

SM_FXO_8E FXO Multipair cable 36-pin SCSI Open 1


(2 x 18 100 Ω male
twisted pairs)
SM_FXS_8E FXS/FXD 1

12
Cable is used to connect BG-20B E1 interface connectors to the xDDF-21.
13
Cable is used to connect BG-20B E1 interface connectors to the xDDF-21.
14
Cable is used to connect BG-20B E1 interface connectors to the xDDF-21.
15
Cable is used to connect BG-20B E1 interface connectors to the xDDF-21.

2-16 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Module or card Interface type Cable type Mating Connector at Qty/


connector other end module

SM_EM_ 2W, 4W, 1


24W6E 2WE&M, or
4WE&M
SM_V24E V.24 1

SM_V35E V.35 1

SM_CODIR_4 Codirectional 64 1
E Kbps
SM_FXO_ FXO Multipair cable 36-pin SCSI 36-pin SCSI 1
8E 16 (2 x 18 100 Ω male male
twisted pairs)
SM_FXS_ FXS/FXD 1
8E 17
SM_EM_ 2W, 4W, 1
24W6E 18 2WE&M, or
4WE&M
SM_V24E 19 V.24 1

SM_V35E 20 V.35 1

SM_CODIR_4 Codirectional 64 1
E 21 Kbps
ICP_VF FXO, FXS, 2W, Six-wire cable RJ-45 Open 8
4W, 2W (voice
E&M,4W E&M, frequency)
or Codirectional
64 Kbps

ICP_V24 V.24 Sync with V.24 cable 15-pin D-type Open 2


controls female
V.24 transparent V.24 cable 9-pin D-type Open 8
female
V.24 Async with 4
controls
ICP_V35 V.35 V.35 cable M34 male Open 2

16
Cable is used to connect the SM_10E module to the applied ICP.
17
Cable is used to connect the SM_10E module to the applied ICP.
18
Cable is used to connect the SM_10E module to the applied ICP.
19
Cable is used to connect the SM_10E module to the applied ICP.
20
Cable is used to connect the SM_10E module to the applied ICP.
21
Cable is used to connect the SM_10E module to the applied ICP.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-17


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be prepared on site. The following table lists the type of
cables and mating connectors needed to prepare cables for each BG-20 module.
For each optical interface, ECI Telecom supplies patch cords with mating
optical connectors already attached to the fiber. Therefore, only the optical
termination on the ODF side, which is installation-dependent, must be installed
on site.
The optical fibers for connecting to equipment installed in a given rack should
enter the rack from the top, be threaded through cable guides running along the
rack side rails, and end at the FST. The FST must contain enough fiber length
for extracting modules from the BG-20 and for replacing fiber in case of
damage (splicing repairs).
When routing fibers, make sure to observe the minimum bending radius (35
mm).

Table 2-6: Optical fibers and mating connector data

I/O module Interface type Fiber type Mating Qty./


connector module
MXC20 STM-1 optical One pair of fiber LC male 4 fibers
patch cords per
interface
MXC20 STM-4 optical One pair of fiber LC male 4 fibers
patch cords per
interface
MXC20 STM-1 optical One fiber patch LC male 2 fibers
single-fiber cord per interface
bidirectional
SMD1 STM-1 optical One pair of fiber LC male 4 fibers
patch cords per
interface
SMD1H STM-1 optical One pair of fiber LC male 4 fibers
patch cords per
interface
SMD1 STM-1 optical One fiber patch LC male 2 fibers
single-fiber cord per interface
bidirectional
SMD1H STM-1 optical One fiber patch LC male 2 fibers
single-fiber cord per interface
bidirectional
OMS4B STM-4 optical One pair of fiber LC male 2 fibers
patch cords per
interface

2-18 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I/O module Interface type Fiber type Mating Qty./


connector module
OMS4H STM-4 optical One pair of fiber LC male 2 fibers
patch cords per
interface
ESW_2G_8F_E GbE optical One pair of fiber LC male 4 fibers
interface patch cords per
interface
S1_4 STM-1 optical One pair of fiber LC male 8 fibers
patch cords per
interface

W or k a nd Equipm e nt Sa fe t y
NOTE: BG-20 equipment is intended for installation in
restricted-access areas only.

BG-20 shelves contain power sources of varying voltages. Take note of the
following guidelines for installing the shelves:

Be for e you st a r t :
 Ensure the integrity of the grounding connections
 Make sure that sufficient lighting is available
 Do not work on any equipment when it is connected to a voltage source
(DC or AC)
 Ensure that the maximum working temperature does not exceed 70°C
 Use only insulated tools
 Wear protective clothing as required by the requisite safety regulations
 Do not install or maintain equipment connected to external lines (for
example, E1 tributaries) during thunderstorms
 Avoid contact with high-voltage sources when installing shelves, cards, and
modules
 Make sure you are familiar with the warning signals and labels on the
equipment, and strictly observe the procedures needed to avoid the
indicated hazards

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-19


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Grounding Requirem ents


All the equipment, including BG-20 shelves, ancillary units, and equipment
from other vendors, must be properly grounded at all times. Good equipment
grounding is necessary to protect personnel and equipment, minimize noise,
and allow the discharge of accumulated static charges to earth.

Ra ck Gr ou n din g Re qu ir e m e n t s
Connect the rack to the site grounding bar with a ground cable according to
ETSI recommendations (top/bottom connection).
The rack is supplied with a main copper or brass grounding bolt welded to the
rack frame. The grounding stud is identified on the rack by the ground symbol
label.
The rack grounding bolt must be connected to the site grounding bar by a 35
mm2 (2 AWG) grounding cable or thicker, as short as possible, complying with
UL/ETSI recommendations. The bolt must be free of paint. The cable should
be made of copper strands, and terminated on both sides with bolt terminals.

NOTE: If necessary, the gauge of the grounding lead can also


be reduced to the gauge of the RAP power leads.

The rack mounting rails must be free of paint, and provide electrical continuity
to the main grounding bolt. The resistance between any rail and the rack main
grounding bolt must be less than 0.1 Ω.
Pay particular attention to the area in which the RAP is attached. Remove paint
from the rack in this area to ensure efficient electrical contact.

CAUTION: Connect the RAP grounding bolt to the rack


grounding bolt with a grounding cable complying with
UL/ETSI recommendations. The cable should include bolt
terminals on both ends, and should be securely fastened with
a nut and a star washer.

2-20 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pow er Supply Requirem ents


The BG-20B shelf requires two power sources with a nominal voltage of -48
VDC. Each power source is protected by a UL-listed circuit breaker installed in
the RAP. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit
supplied with the equipment, and therefore, their current rating is in accordance
with the order.
The site operator must provide a readily accessible UL-listed disconnect device
incorporated in the fixed power wiring of the site. This device limits the
maximum delivered current to a safe value.

Table 2-7: Circuit breaker data

Shelf ID Shelf-to-RAP Circuit Quantity per shelf


connection type breaker
amps
BG-20B One cable per 2A  One for nonredundant powering
INF_30B input  Two for redundant powering
BG-20E One cable per 3.5 A  One for nonredundant powering
INF_30E input  Two for redundant powering

Laser Safety Requirem ents

La se r Cla ssifica t ion


The equipment and components with laser devices described in this manual
comply with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety
standards, including IEC-60825-1 - Safety of Laser Products and IEC-825 –
Safety of Optical Fiber Communication Systems.
With specific regard to the laser, BG-20 equipment complies with laser product
performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products.
The product and its accessories do not emit hazardous light, and the beam is
totally enclosed during all operating modes and maintenance.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-21


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

W a r n in g La be ls for La se r Pr odu ct s
The following labels are affixed to the shelf front panel. The labels indicate that
the product is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product, Hazard Class 1M.

La se r Sa fe t y St a t u t or y W a r n in g
All personnel involved in equipment installation and maintenance must be
aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective devices
generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly observe
the applicable safety precautions and in particular must avoid staring into
optical connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.

La se r D e vice Ope r a t in g Pr e ca u t ion s


In addition to the general precautions described in this section, be sure to
observe the following warnings when operating a product equipped with a laser
device. Failure to observe these warnings could result in fire, bodily injury, and
damage to the equipment.

2-22 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

WARNING: To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous


radiation:

 When performing maintenance and other activities on


equipment using lasers, it is recommended that you use
protection goggles for the wavelength range of 1300 nm to
1600 nm.
 Only authorized personnel should carry out hot insertion
or swapping of an optical module or optical interface
module.
 To prevent irremediable damage to your eyes, avoid
looking into the fiber when hot-removing and/or inserting
a fiber termination.
 Place plastic covers on module fiber ports and fiber
terminations that are not currently in use.
 Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform
procedures associated with the laser device other than
those specified herein.

It is strictly forbidden to interfere with any protective devices


and interlocks that are used to prevent direct exposure to the
laser beam.

La se r I n for m a t ion
Information regarding the various optical modules available for the BG-20
platform is provided in the following table.

Table 2-8: LC transceivers laser information STM-4SFP

Module Parameter Data

STM-4 SFP Laser designation S3 L3 L5


Operating wavelength 1310 1310 1550
(nm)
Source type Single mode Single mode Single
mode
Minimum mean launched -15 -3 -3
power (dBm)
Maximum mean launched -8 +2 +2
power (dBm)

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-23


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table 2-9: LC transceivers laser information STM-1 SFP

Module Parameter Data


STM-1 SFP Laser designation S3 L3 L5 BD 3 22 BD 5 23
Operating 1310 1310 1550 1310 1550
wavelength (nm)
Source type Single Single Single Single Single
mode mode mode mode mode
Minimum mean -15 -5 -5 -14 -14
launched power (dBm)
Maximum mean -8 0 0 -8 -8
launched power (dBm)

Table 2-10: LC transceivers laser information STM-16 SFP

Module Parameter Data


STM-16 SFP Laser designation I3 S3 L3 L5
Operating 1310 1310 1310 1550
wavelength (nm)
Source type Single Single Single Single
mode mode mode mode
Minimum mean 10 -5 -2 -2
launched power (dBm)
Maximum mean -3 0 3 3
launched power (dBm)

22
Single-fiber bidirectional transceivers with a transmit wavelength of 1310 nm.
23
Single-fiber bidirectional transceivers with a transmit wavelength of 1550 nm.

2-24 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pr ot e ct ion Aga in st ESD


This section provides guidelines regarding the protection of BG-20 equipment
and its components against electrostatic damage during handling,
packing/unpacking, transport, installation, commissioning, inspections,
servicing, and maintenance.
Electronic equipment, assemblies, and components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge or include sensitive items are identified by the basic
ESD warning symbol shown in the following figure.

Figure 2-2: Basic ESD warning symbol

The information provided in this section is in line with CENELEC Electronic


Components Committee (CECC) specification CECC 00 015, which deals with
protection of devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESDS).
Most types of electronic equipment, assemblies, and components can be
damaged by electrostatic discharges. An electrostatic discharge between two
objects occurs when an object carrying static electrical charges touches or is
brought near another object.
Static electrical charges appear as a result of friction between surfaces of
insulating materials or separation of two such surfaces, and may also be
induced by electrical fields. Routine activities such as walking across an
insulating floor, friction between garment parts, friction between objects, and
so on, can easily build up charges to levels that may cause damage, especially
when humidity is low.
In many cases, the build-up of charge can be avoided by using special
materials, for example, garments and packaging can be made of antistatic
materials or materials that have high resistance, but yet are not insulators.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-25


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

The best way to avoid damage by electrostatic discharge is a combination of


means and procedures that achieves the following goals:
 Avoids build-up of electrostatic charges
 Creates a protected work environment that helps prevent electrostatic
discharges
 Provides means for controlled discharge of any accumulated electrostatic
charges when entering the protected work environment

NOTE: An area in which ESDS can be handled with


minimum risk of damage as a result of electrostatic discharge
or fields, and in which the operator is not exposed to
additional risks, is called an ESD Protected Area (EPA).

Personnel Training
During production and assembly, equipment is handled in workspaces
especially prepared and certified to serve as a permanent EPA. However, in
many cases the environment in which the same equipment is installed or
maintained cannot be assumed to form an EPA with a permanently controlled
boundary. Therefore, all the work involving handling of unprotected ESDS
must be considered as field work.
Field work in this context includes such activities as service and maintenance,
installation, site inspections, and commissioning of components and assemblies
classified as ESDS, together with associated packing and unpacking activities.
All the staff involved in field work must be trained to perform field work in the
same way as work performed in permanent EPAs with respect to the material
quality, personal responsibilities, training, labeling, and packing.

2-26 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Be for e You St a r t
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Use of a Tem porary EPA


Where necessary, a temporary EPA must be used. The EPA toolkit includes:

 Wrist strap with 1 M Ω series resistor

 Bonding strap with 1 M Ω series resistor


 ESD carpet (work surface), 0.25 m2 minimum
The temporary EPA must include temporary controlled work surfaces and/or
flooring capable of providing protection against ESD.

CAUTION: The temporary EPA must be constructed in a way


that ensures electrical bonding of all the materials used, and
prevents the occurrence of any sudden changes in potential
within the EPA that could cause unacceptable voltages or
discharges to be applied to ESDS.

A means of equipotentially bonding the operator and any work surface and
flooring to ground must be used. For this purpose, the work surface and wrist
straps must be bonded either to a designated ground bonding point or to the
equipment being serviced.
Whenever available, the mains’ ground serves as the ESD grounding facility.

WARNING:While the operator is within the temporary EPA,


the minimum value of resistance used for bonding to ground
must limit the current to ground, produced by voltages
accessible to the operator, to limits specified as safe by the
applicable regulations (see, for example, CECC 00 015). The
same approach is applicable to the surface resistance and
resistance to ground of materials used for temporary work
surfaces and flooring

To enable ESD bonding to ground of equipment racks and any other


nonmoveable equipment containing ESDS, an ESD ground bonding facility
must be located near such equipment, or the equipment must be fitted with a
designated ground bonding point presenting a resistance to ground not greater
than 1 MΩ.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 2-27


Be for e You St a r t BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

W ork Arrangem ents W ithin a Tem porary


EPA
To ensure that effective ESD protection is indeed achieved, the following
arrangements must be observed by persons entering and/or performing field
work within a temporary EPA area:
 All operators working within a temporary EPA area must wear, as a
minimum, an ESD antistatic protecting garment made of cotton.
 If the extent of the temporary work area is such that the operator needs to
walk and move within that area, the floor of the area must be capable of
providing protection against ESD.
 The operator must be bonded to ground at all times when handling ESDS.
 If it becomes necessary to remove an ESDS from equipment and transfer it
to a temporary work surface away from the equipment, the ESDS must be
given protective packaging unless equipotential bonding to ground of the
operator is maintained.
 An ESDS must be placed directly into protective packaging when it is
removed from equipment. A replacement ESDS must be kept in its
protective packaging until required for immediate installation in the
equipment.
 The field service operator must ensure that the materials and tools
necessary to maintain and control the temporary EPA are available at the
place of the field work at service time.
 All tools for use within the EPA must, as far as is practical, be constructed
so that they do not generate or hold an induced electrostatic charge.

2-28 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


3
Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion

I n this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 3-1
Preliminary Preparations ................................................................................. 3-2
Installation Sequence ....................................................................................... 3-2
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................. 3-5
Installation Options.......................................................................................... 3-6
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks.................................................................. 3-8
Installing the BG-20B Shelf in the Rack ....................................................... 3-29
Installing the BG-20E Shelf in the Rack ....................................................... 3-35
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the BG-20 Shelf ........................................ 3-42

Ove r vie w
This chapter provides general instructions for the installation of the BG-20 and
auxiliary equipment.
The procedures for equipment replacement and upgrades are similar to those
described for the installation of the equipment, and when relevant, notes
regarding live replacement or upgrade are inserted in these procedures.
The information appearing in this chapter should be used in conjunction with
specific site installation plans in the particular customer network. If you are
interested in obtaining design or installation assistance from ECI Telecom’s
Customer Support team, or wish to prepare a network installation plan, contact
your ECI Telecom sales representative.
The BG-20 shelves, cards, modules, and ancillary equipment are described in
the BroadGate BG-20 Reference Manual.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-1


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pr e lim ina r y Pr e pa r a t ions


The installation procedures provided in this chapter assume that:
 The sites at which the installation procedures are carried out comply with
the requirements listed in Site Preparation (on page 2-4).)
 The preliminary preparations specified in Before You Start (on page 2-1)
have been completed.
Before you start, determine what equipment is to be installed in the rack by
referring to the site installation plan, and note the exact position of each unit.
To avoid errors, it is recommended that you mark the prescribed positions on
the rack rails using a soft pencil.

I nst a lla t ion Se que nce


Each component of the BG-20 system is supplied separately and must be
installed in the correct sequence according to the site plan.
A high-density installation might include the equipment illustrated in the
following figure. The different components in the illustration are described,
correlating to the steps in the following table.

NOTE: If you are not installing an FST for a particular BG-20


shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the
rack in case optical modules are added in the future. If you
are not installing a BG-20E for a particular BG-20B shelf, it
is highly recommended that you leave enough empty space
above the BG-20B shelf in the rack in case a BG-20E shelf is
added in the future.

CAUTION:
 If additional equipment is used in the rack, a heat buffer or
a buffer plate must be installed between any such
additional equipment and the BG-20 shelf to minimize the
transfer of heat from shelf to shelf. This heat buffer must
be purchased from ECI Telecom.
 During the installation of equipment in the rack, make
sure all the optical connectors are closed by protective
caps. Do not remove the cap until an optical fiber is
connected to the corresponding connector.

3-2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

For illustrations of installation options, see Installation Options (on page 3-6).

Figure 3-1: Typical installation of a single BG-20 shelf in a 2200 ETSI rack

NOTE: The FST should be installed below the BG-20B. If


the BG-20E is not installed, space above the BG-20B should
be reserved for the BG-20E.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-3


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Depending on the specific equipment being installed as per the site installation
plan, the installation of a BG-20 system comprises the general stages described
in the following table, listed in the required order of execution.

Table 3-1: Outline of typical BG-20B equipment installation sequence

Step Procedure
1 Install a rack (if required)
2 Unpack and perform a visual inspection
3 Install ancillary equipment in the rack, including:
 RAP unit
 FST (optional)
 Optional ODF units
 Optional DDF units
 Optional SM_10E ICP units

4 Install the BG-20B shelf in the rack


5 Install the Dslot module in the BG-20B shelf (if required)
6 Install the SFP modules in the BG-20B shelf (for MXC20 and
SMD1/OMS4B)
7 Install the BG-20E shelf in the rack (if required)
8 Install the power module in the BG-20E shelf
9 Install extension cards in the BG-20E shelf
10 Install the BG-OW in the rack (if required)
11 Route and connect all cables and fibers, including:
 Power and alarm cables
 Optical fibers to optical modules transceivers
 Traffic cables to electrical cards
 Data cables
 Timing cables
 Management cable
 Orderwire cable
 PCM interface cables

3-4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Unpa ck ing a nd Pe r for m ing


Visua l I n spe ct ion
Be for e you st a r t :
Before unpacking, make a preliminary inspection of the shipping boxes.
Evidence of damage should be reported immediately to the carrier, the project
manager, and your local ECI Telecom representative.

CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices

Proper handling and grounding precautions required

BG-20 equipment contains components sensitive to


electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent ESD damage,
strictly observe all the precautions listed in Protection Against
ESD (on page 2-25). Keep parts and cards in their antistatic
packaging material until you are ready to install them.

The use of an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded


equipment frame or rack is recommended when handling
cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection
to internal connectors.

You must unpack the equipment on a clean flat surface.

To unpa ck t he e qu ipm e nt :
1. Place the shipping boxes with the top upwards, cut the sealing tape using a
short knife so as not to damage the internal items, and open the top flaps.
2. Remove the items contained in the box and inspect each item for damage.
Check for loose parts or any visual damage to the rack, shelf, and auxiliary
equipment. Also check the integrity of all the connectors, leads, and cables.

NOTE: Do not remove plastic covers from optical connectors


until optical cables are connected to them.

3. Search the shipping boxes for any additional small items that may be
present.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-5


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

4. Open each of the module and card packages for inspection, but do not
remove the modules/cards from their individual protective packages until
they can be inserted in the shelf.
5. Check the contents of the shipping boxes against the packing list attached
to each box. If damaged parts are detected or if any parts are missing,
notify the project manager and your local ECI Telecom representative.

I nst a lla t ion Opt ions


It is recommended that BG-20 shelves be installed in ECI Telecom
recommended racks. These racks can be installed on wooden, concrete, or
suspended floors, or suspended from overhead mountings.
The following racks are supported:
 Standard 19” rack
 Standard ETSI
 Open frame

NOTE: BG-20 shelves can also be installed in standard street


cabinets. Consult ECI Telecom for more details.

By default, the BG-20 is shipped with 19” mounting brackets.


If you are installing in an ETSI rack, ETSI brackets must be
ordered separately and replaced in the field.

You can install up to eight BG-20B shelves in a rack, or you can install up to
four BG-20 shelves (with the BG-20E) in a rack. Typical installation of four
BG-20 shelves with the BG-20E in an ETSI 2200 rack is shown in the
following figure.

3-6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Figure 3-2: Typical installation of four BG-20 shelves

If necessary, contact the ECI Telecom Customer Support team or your ECI
Telecom sales representative for help in meeting your specific installation
requirements.

NOTE: The BG-20 can be installed in ETSI and US 23” racks


with filters or in 19” racks without filters, which have been
approved by ECI Telecom.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-7


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nst a llin g Ancilla r y Unit s in


Ra ck s
ECI Telecom offers various accessories for efficient and optimal installation of
equipment in racks. Contact ECI Telecom’s Customer Support team or your
ECI Telecom sales representative if you need custom modifications to standard
items, or for additional items.
This section includes instructions for the installation of ancillary units. The
specific units you need to install depend on your site installation plan, and may
include one or more of the following:
 RAP unit: for the connection of up to four or eight BG-20 shelves (BG-20
with BG-20E is counted as two shelves) on the same rack, usually located
at the top of the rack. For more information, see Installing the RAP-BG (on
page 3-9) and Installing the RAP-100 (on page 3-16).
 FST: located under the BG-20B shelf, recommended for installations with a
large number of optical modules. For more information, see Installing the
Fiber Storage Tray (on page 3-20).
 ODF units: For more information, see Installing the ODF (on page 3-21).
 xDDF-21: This unit must be installed for unbalanced E1 interfaces. For
more information, see Installing the xDDF-21 Patch Panel (on page 3-25).
 ICP_MPC30: This unit is used to distribute the concentrated Auxiliary
connector on the MCP30 panel into dedicated connectors for each function.
For more information, see Installing the ICP_MCP30 (on page 3-26).
 AC_CONV_UNIT: This unit is an AC power shelf that can be mounted
separately on the rack. For more information, see Installing the
AC_CONV_UNIT (on page 3-28).
In general, ancillary units are attached to the rack side rails by four M6 Phillips
screws. No preparation is required before installation. The following sections
provide mechanical installation instructions for units that require additional
procedures. Skip sections that are not relevant to your particular application.

CAUTION: If additional equipment other than BG-20 shelves


is used in the rack, a heat buffer must be installed between
any such additional equipment and the BG-20 shelf to
minimize the transfer of heat from shelf to shelf. Consult your
ECI Telecom representative regarding the exact heat buffer
required.

3-8 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling the RAP- BG

Be for e You St a r t :
Before connecting DC power cables refer to DC Power Cables.
For a description of the BG-RAP, refer to BG-20 Reference Manual.

To inst a ll t he RAP- BG:


1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Install the RAP-BG in the prescribed location.
3. Ground the RAP-BG to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-BG.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the BroadGate shelves to the RAP-BG.
6. Install circuit breakers.
7. Check power wiring.

Pr e pa r in g D C I n pu t Pow e r Ca ble s
NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) should be
connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with
a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB), and
HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards the positive lead (+48 V)
should be connected with a blue cable, and the negative lead
(-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that
describe DC power cable connections, use cables with
appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area
of residence.

The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the RAP-
BG source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each
source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of
50 mm2 (.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a
compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.

NOTE: When the RAP-BG provides power to a single


BroadGate shelf, lower gauge cables may be used. Refer to
DC Power Cables for DC power cable requirements.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-9


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared


at the prescribed rack location, before attaching the lugs make
sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage
source.

To pr e pa r e a D C pow e r ca ble :
1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead
jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself.

4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 above for the black lead.

I n st a llin g t h e RAP- BG
The RAP-BG is attached to the rack side rails at the top position of the rack.

To inst a ll t he RAP- BG:


 Attach the RAP-BG to the side rails and secure it with the four screws,
washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.

To gr oun d t he RAP- BG:


1. The RAP-BG grounding stud is located on its bottom cover. Use the
following figure to identify it.

Figure 3-3: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud

3-10 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements


described in Grounding Requirements (on page 2-20).
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-BG grounding
stud, using a spring, washer, and nut.
4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack
grounding stud.

To conne ct D C input pow e r ca ble s t o t he RAP- BG:


1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the
RAP-BG by referring to the following figure.

Figure 3-4: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes

2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-BG front cover and remove
the cover.
3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board
by referring to the following figure (showing the terminals at source A side;
a similar board is used at source B side).

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-11


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Figure 3-5: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG

CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to


identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-BG power terminal
board.

4. Bring the two leads of one DC source A input power cable to the
appropriate RAP-BG opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on
the power terminal board (see the previous figure).
6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut
with a torque of 1450 N cm to 1600 N cm.
7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
the power terminal board (see the previous figure).
8. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug.
9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.
10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using
cable ties.

During the following procedure, refer to the figures illustrating the RAP-BG
DC connections in Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG (on page
3-12).

3-12 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

To conne ct t he D C pow e r ca ble t o a she lf:


1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the
RAP-BG.
2. Insert the DC power cable end terminated in lugs of the BG-20 shelf
through the +opening for shelf power cables connecting to source A. If
more shelves are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Shelf 1 cable.
3. Attach the red lead lug of the shelf power cable to the positive stud terminal
of Shelf 1 on the power terminal board.
4. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut
with a torque of 320 N cm to 350 N cm.
5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of
Shelf 1 on the power terminal board.
6. Repeat Step 4 for the black lead lug.
7. Identify the shelves grounding terminals located on the inner side panel of
the RAP-BG according to the following figure.

Figure 3-6: RAP-BG shelf power cable grounding screws

8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the shelf power cable to the
ground stud terminal located on the RAP-BG side panel.
9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug.
10. If more BG-20 shelves are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9 for each
shelf power cable.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-13


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the


shelves to source B.
12. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding shelf position, and then securely attach the power cable to
the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
accordance with its function.

To I n st a ll t h e RAP- BG Cir cu it Br e a k e r s

To inst a ll t he RAP- BG cir cuit br e a k e r s:


1. If the RAP-BG front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening the RAP-BG front cover to the RAP-BG chassis and
remove the cover (see the following figure).

Figure 3-7: RAP-BG front cover removal

2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1


(the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment; its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration).

Figure 3-8: RAP-BG circuit breakers installation

3-14 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
RAP-BG source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure.
4. If more shelves are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert
the circuit breakers into the corresponding shelf positions of the power
terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 above for source
B circuit breakers.

To che ck D C volt a ge pola r it y:


1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see
Grounding Requirements (on page 2-20)).
2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-BG.
3. Set all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to ON.
4. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive
and negative contacts of each power cable.
The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector
contacts assembled on cable end, connected to the BG-20 shelf, as seen
when looking into the connector.

Figure 3-9: BG shelf DC input power connector pin functions

5. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to
-57.6 VDC), and that it has the correct polarity.
6. Return all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to OFF.
7. Disconnect the RAP-BG input power sources.
8. Reinstall the RAP-BG front cover and fasten it using the two captive
screws.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-15


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling the RAP- 1 0 0


Install and ground the RAP-100, as described in the following steps.

To inst a ll t he RAP- 1 0 0 :
 Attach the RAP-100 to the side rails at the top of the rack, and secure it
with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation kit.

To gr oun d t he RAP- 1 0 0 :
1. Identify the RAP-100 grounding screw located on its bottom cover.
2. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-100 grounding
screw using a spring washer and nut.
3. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack
grounding stud.

Conne ct ing t he D C input pow e r ca ble s t o t he RAP-


100

Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the RAP-
100 (see the following figure). The RAP-100 has circuits for connection to two
separate input power sources designated SOURCE A and SOURCE B. Each
circuit has sockets for four circuit breakers, and terminals for connecting the
power source and four loads.

To conne ct t he D C pow e r sour ce ca ble s:


1. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-100 front cover and
remove the cover.
2. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board
(see the following figure). This figure shows the terminals at the Source A
side. The same board is used at the Source B side.

CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to


identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-100 power
terminals board.

3. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate
RAP-100 opening. If an additional power source (Source B) is used, repeat
Steps 3 to 4 for Source B.

3-16 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

4. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using
cable ties.

Figure 3-10: Connection of DC power cables to the RAP-100

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-17


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Conne ct ing t he BG- 2 0 B pow e r ca ble s t o t he


RAP- 1 0 0

Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the
RAP-100.

Figure 3-11: Connection of the BG-30B DC power cable

To pr e pa r e t he BG- 2 0 B pow e r ca ble s for conne ct ion t o t h e


RAP- 1 0 0 :
1. Cut the three wires near the compression lugs at the open end of the power
cable.
2. Strip about 5 mm of the white and black lead jackets.
3. Repeat Steps 1 to 2 for another power cable (for the other INF_30B).

3-18 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

To conne ct t he D C pow e r ca ble s of t he BG- 2 0 B:


1. Insert the DC power cable open ends of the BG-20B through the Source A
RAP-100 opening.
2. Connect the red lead of the BG-20B power cable to a load-positive
terminal.
3. Connect the black lead of the power cable to the corresponding circuit
breaker (load-negative terminal).
4. Connect the grounding (shield) lead of the BG-20 power cable to a ground
terminal located beneath the circuit breaker sockets.
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to connect another DC power cable of the BG-20B to
RAP-100 Source B.

I nst a llin g t he RAP- 1 0 0 cir cuit br e a k e r s

The RAP-100 consists of two groups of circuit breakers. One circuit breaker
from each group must be connected to each BG-20B shelf installed in the rack.
Circuit breakers are included in the installation kit supplied with the equipment.
Their rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration. Circuit
breakers must be two amperes for the BG-20B.

To inst a ll t he RAP- 1 0 0 cir cuit br e a k e r s:


1. If the RAP-100 front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening the front cover to the chassis and remove it.
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of Load 1
(the circuit breaker is supplied in the installation kit).
3. Insert the circuit breakers into the sockets located on the RAP 100 Source
A power terminals board for the BG-20B.
4. Repeat Steps 2 to 3 for power circuit B.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-19


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling the Fiber Storage Tray


The FST should be installed 50 mm below the fiber guide. If additional
equipment is installed below the FST, such as another BG-20 shelf, an
additional 50 mm must be left free between the FST and such equipment.

To m ount t he FST in t he r a ck :
1. Attach the FST to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the
detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each shelf. When preparing the fiber,
refer also to the safety information appearing in Work and Equipment
Safety (on page 2-19) and Power Supply Requirements (on page 2-21).
3. Label the cables in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports
of the ETSI A rack, or the rack sidewalls in case of an ETSI B rack.
5. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to release the latch, and pull
the FST towards you to open it.

NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it
fully so that you can thread the fibers.

6. Thread the fibers into the FST, as illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 3-12: Threading optical fibers in the FST

3-20 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside


the FST and fastened with Velcro strips.

7. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.


8. Return the FST to the rack until it latches in place with a click.

CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are


closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or with
the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective cap
until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding
connector, and immediately install a protective cap after a
cable is disconnected.

The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm.


Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission
characteristics.

I nstalling the ODF


Identify the prescribed ODF locations in the rack before performing the
following procedures.
The ODF is supplied with two sets of rack mounting brackets: one for 19” and
ETSI racks, and the other for 23” 7-foot bay racks. The 19”/ETSI rack
mounting brackets can be used for both ETSI A and ETSI B racks.

To a t t a ch t he r a ck m oun t ing br a ck e t s t o t he OD F:
1. Refer to the following figure to identify the required set of rack mounting
brackets.
2. Attach each bracket to the corresponding ODF side panel with three
screws, as shown in the following figure.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-21


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Figure 3-13: Attaching rack mounting brackets to the ODF

To conne ct opt ica l fibe r s t o t he OD F:


1. Push the release button on the ODF front panel to the left to release the
latch and pull it towards you. The cover opens downwards.

Figure 3-14: ODF front panel

3-22 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Figure 3-15: ODF open view

2. Hold the end of the swing-out tray and pull it out to gain access to the ODF
components.
3. Open the two cover thumb nuts and remove the protective cover from the
ODF splice support.
4. Insert the external fibers cable through the protective tube.

Figure 3-16: ODF fiber routes

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-23


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

5. Route the fiber ends through the cable guides to the splice support area.
6. Identify the adapter panel pigtail to be spliced to each user fiber.
7. Insert splicing sleeves over the pigtail, splice the user fiber to the pigtail,
and slide the splicing sleeve over the splice.
8. Place the splicing sleeve in one of the slots in the splice support.

NOTE: When more than 12 fibers are connected to the ODF,


first start filling the slots of the lower splice support. After the
slots are occupied, reinstall the top splice support and
continue filling the support slots.

9. After splicing all the fibers, reinstall the protective cover removed in Step
3.
10. Push the swing-out tray back into the unit.
11. Close the ODF front cover by pushing it up until it clicks to the unit.
12. Refer to “To attach the rack mounting brackets to the ODF” procedure (on
page 3-16) and secure the user fibers with cable ties to the fiber fastening
bracket at the rear of the ODF.

CAUTION: To prevent damage to fibers, do not tighten the


cable ties.

To inst a ll OD F unit s in a r a ck :
 Install each ODF in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the rack
side rails with four screws.

3-24 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling the xDDF- 2 1 Patch Panel


The BG-20 only supports balanced E1s directly. For unbalanced E1s, the
xDDF-21 must be installed with the BG-20. The xDDF-21 provides balanced-
to-unbalanced conversion for 21 E1s. The number of xDDF-21 units that
should be installed with one BG-20B unit is based on the number of PME1_21
modules (for the number of unbalanced E1s required).

To inst a ll a n x D D F- 2 1 pa t ch pa ne l:
1. Route the 100-pin SCSI cables leading from the E1 interfaces on the
PME1_21 panel along the side of the rack to the location where the xDDF-
21 patch panel is to be installed.
2. Before you install the patch panel, connect the SCSI cables leading to the
rear of the xDDF-21 patch panel. The cables are marked J1 and J2 and
should be connected to their respective connectors.
3. Attach the patch panel to the rack rails and secure using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
4. Connect the traffic cables to the front of the xDDF-21 patch panel, and
make a note of the appropriate channels on the identification label on the
inside of the panel door.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-25


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling the I CP_ MCP3 0


To distribute the concentrated Auxiliary connector on the MCP30 panel into
dedicated connectors for each function, an interconnection panel (ICP) for the
MCP30 was developed. The ICP is connected to the MCP30 module through a
back-to-back cable with 36-pin SCSI connectors on both sides. The
ICP_MCP30 can be installed anywhere in the rack.

To inst a ll a n I CP_ M CP3 0 :


1. Identify the prescribed position of the ICP_MCP30 in the rack in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
2. Place the ICP_MCP30 in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing
pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to the rack side
rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.

Figure 3-17: Installing ICP_MCP30 in the rack

3-26 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling SM_ 1 0 E I CPs


To simplify installation and connection to customer termination equipment,
three types of interconnection panels (ICPs) were developed. The ICP is
connected to the SM_10E module using a special cable that spreads the
condensed cable to connector types commonly used for each service. Each ICP
can serve one SM_10E traffic module. An ICP can be installed anywhere in the
rack.

To inst a ll a n SM _ 1 0 E I CP:
1. Identify the prescribed position of the ICP in the rack in accordance with
the rack installation plan.
2. Place the ICP in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing pins to
hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to the rack side rails
with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.

Figure 3-18: Installing SM_10E ICPs in the rack

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-27


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling the AC_ CONV_ UNI T


The AC_CONV_UNIT is an AC power shelf that can be mounted separately
on the rack. The AC_CONV_UNIT is supplied with one set of combined rack
mounting brackets for 19” and ETSI racks. The 19”/ETSI rack mounting
brackets can be used for both ETSI A and ETSI B racks.

Be for e you st a r t :
Be sure to identify the prescribed AC_CONV_UNIT locations in the rack
before performing the following procedure.

To inst a ll a n AC_ CON V_ UN I T:


1. Identify the prescribed position of the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
2. Place the AC_CONV_UNIT in the prescribed position using the two
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place. Then fasten the shelf to the
rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.

Figure 3-19: Installing the AC_CONV_UNIT in the rack

3-28 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nst a llin g t he BG- 2 0 B She lf in


t h e Ra ck
Each BG-20B shelf is supplied with an installed power module and an empty
Dslot (covered by a blank panel). Therefore, the installation activities covered
in this section include:
 Installing the Rail Stiffeners (on page 3-30)
 Attaching the BG-20B Shelf in the Rack (on page 3-31)
 Grounding the BG-20B Shelf (on page 3-31)
After the activities presented in this section have been completed, the BG-20B
shelf is ready for:
 Installing Power Modules in the BG-20B (on page 3-32)
 Installing Dslot Modules (on page 3-33)
 Installing SFP Modules (on page 3-34)

WARNING: Before starting, make sure that the DC power is


not connected to the rack, and that the circuit breakers in the
RAP, if used, are set to OFF.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-29


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling the Rail Stiffeners


If you install the BG-20B in the rack without installing rail stiffeners, the rear
side of the BG-20B shelf will be slightly lower than the front side, due to the
weight of the BG-20B shelf. This makes installation of the BG-20E very
difficult. The rail stiffeners make the BG-20B level after it is installed in the
rack. Two rail stiffeners are shipped along with the BG-20B shelf.

CAUTION: Currently, to install the BG-20E on the BG-20B,


rack stiffeners must be installed.

To inst a ll t he r a ck st iffe ne r s:
1. Locate the two rail stiffeners included as part of the BG-20B shelf package.
2. Determine the position for the rail stiffener on the rack’s left side rail,
according to the position of the BG-20B shelf in the rack, and in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
3. Place the rail stiffener on the rear side of the rack’s left side rail.
4. Fasten the rail stiffener to the rack’s left side rail with two M6 screws and
washers through the uppermost and lowermost holes of the rail stiffener.
5. Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to install the second rail stiffener on the rack’s right
side rail.

Figure 3-20: Installing the rail stiffeners in the rack

3-30 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Attaching the BG- 2 0 B Shelf in the Rack

WARNING: Before starting, make sure that the DC power is


not connected to the rack, and that the circuit breakers in the
RAP, if used, are set to OFF.

Be for e you st a r t :
Review the grounding requirements specified in Before You Start (on page
2-1). Obtain the required materials and make sure to perform the grounding
connections in accordance with these requirements.

To a t t a ch a BG- 2 0 B she lf t o a n ECI Te le com r e com m e nde d


r a ck :
1. Identify the prescribed position of the BG-20B shelf in the rack in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
2. Place the BG-20B shelf in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing
pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to the rack side
rails (to the second and third lowest screws in the rail stiffeners) with four
M6 screws and washers.

Grounding the BG- 2 0 B Shelf

Be for e you st a r t :
 Review the grounding requirements specified in Preparing Cables and
Fibers (on page 2-11). Obtain the required materials and make sure to
perform the grounding connections in accordance with these requirements.

To gr oun d t he BG- 2 0 B she lf:


 BG-20B shelf grounding is achieved by connecting the shelf to the rack
using rack mounting brackets. Grounding is provided by contact when the
unit is fastened to the rack.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-31


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling Pow er Modules in the BG- 2 0 B


Each BG-20B shelf must have a power module installed in the power module
slot. Either the INF_20B (for a DC power supply) or AC_CONV_20B (for an
AC power supply) can be configured according to the site installation plan.
The BG-20B is always shipped with a power module installed. The procedure
described in this section is only relevant when you want to replace the power
module.

Figure 3-21: Installing a power module in the BG-20B

To inst a ll a pow e r m odule :


1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment,
and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Insert the rear end of the power module into the card guides.
4. Push the module in until the panel at the front of the module is flush with
the front of the BG-20B shelf. If resistance is felt before the connectors are
flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
5. Secure the module in place by tightening the two screws with a
screwdriver.

3-32 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling Dslot Modules


This section describes the installation process for Dslot modules. For a list of
available Dslot modules and their technical descriptions, refer to the BroadGate
BG-20 Reference Manual.
Dslot module installation consists of removing the Dslot cover panel and
installing the module in the BG-20B shelf.

To inst a ll a D slot m odule in t he BG- 2 0 B she lf:


The Dslot module can be installed in the Dslot of the BG-20B shelf as per the
site installation plan.

Figure 3-22: Installing a Dslot module in the BG-20B

1. Loosen the two screws on the Dslot cover panel.


2. Remove the Dslot cover panel.
3. Check that the Dslot module has not been physically damaged during
shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is
sealed.
4. Remove the Dslot module from its antistatic protection packaging and
perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any
problems.
5. Hold the Dslot module handle and insert the rear end of the Dslot module
into the Dslot module guides.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-33


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

6. Push the module in until the front of the module is flush with the front of
the BG-20B shelf. If resistance is felt, pull the module out and repeat the
procedure.
7. Fasten the two screws on the module panel with a screwdriver to secure the
Dslot module in place.

NOTE: Dslot modules do not support hot insertion. Make


sure the BG-20B is powered off before installing any Dslot
module.

I nstalling SFP Modules


All BG-20B shelves and SMD1/OSM4B modules are shipped without SFP
modules installed. Proper SFP modules must be installed in the field according
to the field installation plan.
ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP transceivers in all optical
interfaces and electrical STM-1 interfaces. Hot swapping is allowed, provided
you observe all the safety precautions described in Before You Start (on page
2-1) during the replacement.

NOTE: Only SFP modules supplied by ECI Telecom can be


used in the BG-20. Otherwise, the laser in SFP module will
always shut down.

Figure 3-23: Installing an SFP module in the BG-20B

3-34 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

To inst a ll a n SFP m odule :


1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment,
and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Insert the rear end of the SFP module plug-in into the prescribed position,
and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the
corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver
clicks into place. If you feel resistance before the transceiver plug-in is
fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the insertion.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for other SFP modules (if required).

I nst a llin g t he BG- 2 0 E She lf in


t h e Ra ck
A very important differentiator of the BG-20 is that it consists of BG-20B and
BG-20E shelves, thus providing a better pay-as-you-grow™ solution. The BG-
20B can cover a large percentage of applications. For more add-drop capacity
and additional functionality, such as Ethernet L2 and PCM, a BG-20E can be
added to the BG-20B. The BG-20E supports live insertion, and can be installed
at any time without affecting the traffic running on the BG-20B. The BG-20E
can also be installed when installing the BG-20B.
Each BG-20E shelf is supplied with a power module slot and extension slots.
All extension slots are initially empty. The three extension slots are covered by
a cover panel.
The installation activities covered in this section include:
 Installing the BG-20E Shelf on the BG-20B Shelf (on page 3-36)
After the activities presented in this section have been completed, the BG-20E
shelf is ready for:
 Installing Power Modules in the BG-20E (on page 3-38)
 Installing Extension Cards in the BG-20E (on page 3-39)
 Installing SFP Modules in the ESW_2G_8F_E or the S1_4 (on page 3-40)
 Installing Traffic Modules in the SM_10E (on page 3-41)

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-35


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling the BG- 2 0 E Shelf on the BG- 2 0 B


Shelf
To install the BG-20E on the BG-20B, a BG-20E installation kit is needed. The
BG-20E installation kit is shipped as part of the BG-20E shelf package. The kit
includes the ASSEMBLE THE BG-20E TO BG-20 ASSY (DWG NO.
3HETC6-3033-0000-68) drawing, which describes the installation process in
detail. Be sure to follow this drawing closely during BG-20E installation. The
following procedure is a high-level summary of the installation process.

WARNING: Before starting to install the BG-20E, make sure


that the DC power cable is not connected to the BG-20E, and
that the circuit breakers in the RAP, if used, are set to OFF.

CAUTION: Before adding the BG-20E shelf


to the BG-20B, ensure that the rail stiffeners
have been installed. Without the rail
stiffeners, it will be very difficult to install
the BG-20E. If the rail stiffeners are not
installed, it is highly recommended that you
first remove the BG-20B from the rack and
then install the rails stiffeners before
proceeding with the BG-20E installation.
For more details, see Installing the Rail
Stiffeners (on page 3-30).

WARNING: Great care should be taken when installing the


BG-20E in order to avoid damage to the BG-20B or BG-20E.
Be sure to follow the drawing provided in the BG-20E
installation kit.

3-36 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

To inst a ll t he BG- 2 0 E she lf on t he BG- 2 0 B she lf:

Figure 3-24: Installing the BG-20E on the BG-20B

1. Locate the BG-20E installation kit in the BG-20E shelf package.


2. Remove the cover plate on the BG-20B top cover by releasing the two
screws.
3. Assemble the MiniBP into the connector in the rear-right area of BG-20B.
Secure the MiniBP in place by tightening the screw with a screwdriver.
Verity that the connectors on the MiniBP and in the BG-20B are fully
mated.
4. Manually insert two pin guides into the top cover of the BG-20B.
5. Assemble the BG-20E shelf on the BG-20B shelf, with the help of the two
pin guides. Verity that the connectors on the MiniBP and in the BG-20E are
fully mated.
6. Insert three rivet snaps into the holes on the bottom of the BG-20E to attach
the BG-20E to the BG-20B. Verity that the caps of the rivets are flat on the
bottom of the BG-20E.
7. Fasten the BG-20E to the rack side rails (to the screws in the rail stiffeners)
with four M6 screws and washers. BG-20E shelf grounding is achieved by
connecting the shelf to the rack using rack mounting brackets. Grounding is
provided by contact when the unit is fastened to the rack.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-37


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling Pow er Modules in the BG- 2 0 E


Each BG-20E shelf must have a power module installed in the power module
slot. Either the INF_20E (for a DC power supply) or AC_CONV_20E (for an
AC power supply) can be configured according to the site installation plan. The
BG-20E is always shipped with the power module slot empty.

Figure 3-25: Installing the power module on the BG-20E

To inst a ll t he pow e r m odule on t he BG- 2 0 E:


1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment,
and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Insert the rear end of the power module into the card guides.
4. Push the module in until the panel at the front of the module is flush with
the front of the BG-20E shelf. If resistance is felt before the connectors are
flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
5. Secure the module in place by tightening the two screws with a
screwdriver.

3-38 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling Extension Cards in the BG- 2 0 E


This section describes the installation process for extension cards. For a list of
available extension cards and their technical descriptions, refer to the
BroadGate BG-20 Reference Manual.
Extension card installation consists of removing the Eslot cover panel and
installing the card in the BG-20E shelf.

To inst a ll a n e x t e nsion ca r d in t he BG- 2 0 E she lf:


Extension cards are installed in the Eslots of the BG-20E shelf in accordance
with the site installation plan.

Figure 3-26: Installing an extension card on the BG-20E

1. Identify the Eslot in which you want to install the extension card, according
to the site installation plan.
2. Loosen the two screws on the Eslot cover panel.
3. Remove the Eslot cover panel.
4. Check that the extension card has not been physically damaged during
shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is
sealed.
5. Remove the extension card from its antistatic protection packaging and
perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any
problems.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-39


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

6. Hold the extension card handles and insert the rear end of the extension
card into the extension card guides.
7. Push the extension card in until the front of the card is flush with the front
of the BG-20E shelf. If resistance is felt, pull the card out and repeat the
procedure.
8. Fasten the two screws on the card panel with a screwdriver to secure the
extension card in place.

NOTE: Extension cards support live insertion. They can be


installed at any time without affecting the existing traffic
running on the BG-20B or BG-20E.

I nstalling SFP Modules in the ESW _ 2 G_ 8 F_ E


or the S1 _ 4
All ESW_2G_8F_E cards are shipped without SFP modules installed for GbE
interfaces. If a GbE interface is needed, the proper SFP module must be
installed in the field according to the field installation plan.
All S1_4 cards are shipped without SFP modules installed for STM-1
interfaces. If an STM-1 interface is needed, the proper SFP module must be
installed in the field according to the field installation plan.
ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP transceivers for GbE and STM-1
interfaces. Hot swapping is allowed, provided you observe all the safety
precautions described in Before You Start (on page 2-1) during the
replacement.

NOTE: Only SFP modules supplied by ECI Telecom can be


used in the ESW_2G_8F_E and S1_4. Otherwise, the laser in
the SFP module always shuts down.

To inst a ll a n SFP t r a nsce ive r in t he ESW _ 2 G_ 8 F_ E or t he


S1 _ 4 :
 Use the same procedure as described in Installing SFP Modules (on page
3-34) to install an SFP transceiver in the ESW_2G_8F_E.

3-40 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling Traffic Modules in the SM_ 1 0 E


The SM_10E consists of a base card and up to three traffic modules. This
section describes the installation process for traffic modules in the SM_10E.
For a list of available traffic modules and their technical descriptions, refer to
the BroadGate BG-20 Reference Manual.
The SM_10E card is supplied with empty traffic module slots. SM_10E traffic
module installation consists of removing the traffic module slot cover panel
and installing the traffic module in the SM_10E card.

To inst a ll a t r a ffic m odule in t he SM _ 1 0 E ca r d:


The traffic module can be installed in the traffic module slot of the SM_10E
card, as per the site installation plan.

Figure 3-27: Installing a traffic module on the SM_10E

1. Loosen the two screws on the traffic module slot cover panel.
2. Remove the traffic module slot cover panel.
3. Check that the traffic module has not been physically damaged during
shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is
sealed.
4. Remove the traffic module from its antistatic protection packaging and
perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any
problems.
5. Hold the traffic module handle and insert the rear end of the traffic module
into the traffic module slot guides.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-41


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

6. Push the module in until the front of the module is flush with the front of
the SM_10E base card. If resistance is felt, pull the module out and repeat
the procedure.
7. Fasten the two screws on the module panel with a screwdriver to secure the
module in place.

NOTE: SM_10E modules support live insertion. They can be


installed at any time without affecting the existing traffic
running on the BG-20B or BG-20E, including the SM_10E.

Conn e ct ing Fibe r s a nd Ca ble s t o


t h e BG- 2 0 Sh e lf
In general, all electrical traffic cables, power cables, alarm cables, and data
cables should be routed along the sides of the rack. All optical fibers should be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the ECI
Telecom recommended rack. Electrical traffic and other cables (DC, alarm,
management, timing, and so on) should be routed along the side of the rack,
held in place with combs.

Connecting Pow er and Alarm Cables to a DC


Pow er Source
Follow the procedure below to connect power and alarm cables to a DC power
source.

To conne ct pow e r a nd a la r m ca ble s:


1. Route the power cables leading from the RAP along the side of the rack to
the appropriate BG-20B and BG-20E shelves, and BG-OW box.

NOTE: For further details about the RAP installation


procedure, see Installing the RAP-BG and Installing the RAP-
100. Installation of the BG-20E and BG-OW are optional.

3-42 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

2. Connect the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 3-pin D-type
female connector, in accordance with the rack installation plan and the
cable tags, to the DC power connectors on the INF_20B, as follows:
 If there is one power source (single power-feeding configuration), the
power cable is connected to the POWER IN A connector or POWER
IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20B.
 If there are two power sources (dual power-feeding configuration), the
power cable from one source is connected to the POWER IN A
connector and the power cable from the second source is connected to
the POWER IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20B.
3. If required, connect the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 3-pin
D-type female connector, in accordance with the rack installation plan and
the cable tags, to the DC power connectors on the INF_20E, as follows:
 If there is one power source (single power-feeding configuration), the
power cable is connected to the POWER IN A connector or POWER
IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20E.
 If there are two power sources (dual power-feeding configuration), the
power cable from one source is connected to the POWER IN A
connector and the power cable from the second source is connected to
the POWER IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20E.
4. If the use of double-headed DC power cables for both the BG-20B and the
BG-20E is required, connect the ends of the DC power cable terminating
with 3-pin D-type female connectors, in accordance with the rack
installation plan and the cable tags, to the DC power connectors on the
INF_20E and INF_20B, as follows:
 If there is one power source (single power-feeding configuration), the
power cable is connected to the POWER IN A connector or POWER
IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20E and INF_20B.
 If there are two power sources (dual power-feeding configuration), the
power cable from one source is connected to the POWER IN A
connector and the power cable from the second source is connected to
the POWER IN B connector on the front panel of the INF_20E and
INF_20B.
 Make sure that the circuit breakers used in this option are 8 A ones.
5. If required, connect the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 3-pin
D-type female connector, in accordance with the rack installation plan and
the cable tags, to the DC power connectors on the BG-OW. The power
cable is connected to the POWER IN connector on the front panel of the
BG-OW.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-43


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

6. Route the alarm cable leading from the RAP along the side of the rack to
the appropriate BG-20B shelf.
7. Connect the free ends of the alarm cable, in accordance with the rack
installation plan and the cable tags, to the ALARMS connector on the front
panel of the BG-20B unit.

Connecting Pow er and Alarm Cables to an


AC Pow er Source
Follow the procedure below to connect power and alarm cables to an AC power
source.

To conne ct pow e r a nd a la r m ca ble s t o a n AC sour ce :


1. Route the power cables leading along the side of the rack to the appropriate
BG-20B and BG-20E shelves.

NOTE: For further details about the RAP installation


procedure, see Installing the RAP-BG and Installing the RAP-
100.

For AC power supplies, the power cable is not connected to


the RAP.

2. Connect the AC power cable for the BG-20B. If AC power is used, connect
the power cable, as follows:
 Connect the female connector of the power cable to the AC INPUT
connector on the AC_CONV_20B module.
 Connect the power cable male connector to the AC line outlet.
3. Connect the AC power cable for the BG-20E shelf. If AC power is used,
connect the power cable, as follows:
 Connect the female connector of the power cable to the AC INPUT
connector on the AC_CONV_20E module.
 Connect the power cable male connector to the AC line outlet.
4. Route the alarm cable along the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-20B
shelf.
5. Connect the free ends of the alarm cable, in accordance with the rack
installation plan and the cable tags, to the ALARMS connector on the front
panel of the BG-20B unit.

3-44 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

NOTE: The BG-OW does not support AC power feeding. To


use the BG-OW, an external AC/DC adapter must be used.

Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules


Before installing the BG-20 shelf and modules, all optical fibers should be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the ECI
Telecom recommended rack into the FST under the BG-20 shelf being
installed, and threaded into the FST. For more information, see Installing the
Fiber Storage Tray.
All optical fibers in the BG-20 shelf are connected to the LC connectors on the
optical SFP transceivers in the front panel of the BG-20B, SMD1 or OMS4B
module, or ESW_2G_8F_E or S1_4 cards.

CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are


closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or with
the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective cap
until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding
connector, and immediately install a protective cap after a
cable is disconnected.

The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm.


Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission
characteristics.

To conne ct a n opt ica l fibe r t o a n SFP m odule :


1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch and pull the
FST out towards you.
2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the
tray.

NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. If you cannot release the
fiber in the halfway position, pull the tray again to open it
fully.

3. Thread the end of the fiber through the rack slots to the optical transceiver
LC connector on the designated module. Leave some slack to prevent
stress.
4. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers using an approved
cleaning kit.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-45


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

5. Remove the cover from the optical transceiver. Connect the fiber connector
to the LC connector on the optical transceiver.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for all optical modules in the BG-20 shelf.
7. When you have completed the connection of all optical modules, gently
push the FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.

Routing and Connecting Electrical I nterface


Cables to the BG- 2 0
This section provides instructions for connecting cables to BG-20 shelves. The
information presented here supplements the information regarding the
connection of power, alarm, and grounding cables described in previous
sections.
Connect the cables to the equipment connectors according to the information
appearing in the relevant cabling diagrams or tables. To identify the physical
location of connectors, use the equipment panel figures appearing in the
BroadGate BG-20 Reference Manual.

Rou t in g a n d Con n e ct in g E1 Ca ble s for


Ba la n ce d E1 I n t e r fa ce s
E1 cables are used to connect to the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces on the
BG-20. There are two types of E1 cable for balanced E1 interfaces:
 Type A1: cable for built-in E1 interfaces in the BG-20B
Each cable consists of a total of 11 E1 twisted pairs (transmit and receive)
supporting 11 E1s when connecting the lower SCSI-50 E1 connector
marked E1(1-11) or 10 E1s when connecting the upper SCSI-50 E1
connector marked E1(12-21). The same cable is used for two E1
connectors. The cable end connecting to the BG-20B shelf is terminated
with a 50-pin SCSI male connector.

 Type B1: cable for E1 interfaces in the ME1_21, ME1_42, or PE1_63


Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs (transmit and receive)
supporting 21 E1s. The cable end connecting to the ME1_21/ME1_42
module or PE1_63 card is terminated with a twin 68-pin VHDCI male
connector.

3-46 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

To conne ct E1 ca ble s t o t he BG- 2 0 :


1. Arrange the E1 traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each E1 cable down to the level of the BG-20 shelf.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening near the shelf until the cable connector is
positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to fasten
the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the BG-20 E1 connectors
with the appropriate DDF connections.
5. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding connectors on the
BG-20B, ME1_21/ME1_42, or PE1_63 front panel.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to


secure the cable connector, as this may damage the BG-20.

6. Secure the cable connector to the BG-20 connector with the cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot reach the
screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size is 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-47


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Rou t in g a n d Con n e ct in g E1 Ca ble s for


Un ba la n ce d E1 I n t e r fa ce s
The BG-20 can only provide balanced E1s directly. For unbalanced E1s, the
xDDF-21 patch panels must be installed with the BG-20. Each xDDF-21
provides balanced-to-unbalanced conversion for 21 E1s.
The cable between the BG-20 and the xDDF-21 (supplied by ECI Telecom)
consists of 21 E1 twisted pairs (transmit and receive) supporting 21 balanced
E1s.
There are two types of cable:
 Cable Type A2: This cable is used to connect built-in E1 interfaces in the
BG-20B to the xDDF-21. The cable end connecting to the BG-20B shelf is
terminated with a twin 50-pin SCSI male connector. The cable end
connecting to the xDDF-21 is terminated with two 50-pin SCSI male
connectors.
 Cable Type B2: This cable is used to connect E1 interfaces in the ME1_21,
ME1_42, or PE1_63 to the xDDF-21. The cable end connecting to the
ME1_21, ME1_42, or PE1_63 is terminated with a 68-pin VHDCI male
connector. The cable end connecting to the xDDF-21 is terminated with
two 50-pin SCSI male connectors.

To conne ct E1 ca ble s be t w e e n t he BG- 2 0 a n d t he x D D F- 2 1 :


1. Arrange the E1 traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull the twin 50-pin SCSI end or twin 68-pin VHDCI end of the cable
down to the level of the BG-20 shelf.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening near the shelf until the cable connector is
positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to fasten
the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Connect the cable connector to the E1 connectors on the front panel of the
BG-20B, the ME1_21/ME1_42 module, or the PE1_63 cards.
5. Secure the cable connector to the BG-20 connectors with four cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot reach the
screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size is 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.
6. Pull the 2 x 50-pin SCSI end of the cable to the level of the xDDF-21.

3-48 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

7. Bend the cables and thread them through the side cable guides of the rack
and through the appropriate opening near the shelf until the cable connector
is positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to
fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
8. Connect the cable connector marked J1 to the 50-pin SCSI connector on the
xDDF-21 panel marked J1. Connect the cable connector marked J2 to the
50-pin SCSI connector on the xDDF-21 panel marked J2.
9. Secure the cable connectors to the xDDF-21 connectors with two cable
connector screws for each connector. Tighten the screws manually. If you
cannot reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
screwdriver (maximum blade size is 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N
cm to 44 N cm.

To conne ct E1 ca ble s be t w e e n t he x D D F- 2 1 a n d t he e x t e r na l
D D F:
 Coaxial cables are used to connect unbalanced E1s between the xDDF-21
and the external DDF. A pair of coaxial cables is used for each E1. These
coaxial cables can be prepared on site. The cable end connecting to the
xDDF-21 is terminated with a DIN 1.0/2.3 connector. The connector on the
other end of the cable depends on the connector used in the external DDF.
For the connection of coaxial cables, refer to Routing and Connecting
Coaxial Cables (on page 3-49).

Rou t in g a n d Con n e ct in g Coa x ia l Ca ble s


Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on the
M345_3, the P345_3E, the electrical STM-1 SFPs on the BG-20B or SMD1,
and the xDDF-21.
As part of the site preparations, suitable cables should be routed from the
relevant DDF (if used) to the intended rack location and connected to DIN
1.0/2.3 connectors. Sufficient length should be available to permit routing the
cables to the appropriate level in the rack.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-49


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

To conne ct individua l coa x ia l t r a ffic ca ble s t o t he BG- 2 0 or


x D D F- 2 1 :
1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in groups
according to the designated electrical interfaces and route them along the
guides at the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-20 unit or xDDF-21
unit.
2. Connect the BG-20 or xDDF-21 end of the cables to DIN 1.0/2.3
connectors and the other end to the relevant coaxial cable connector,
crimping the cable as required.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack so
that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the appropriate adapter.
Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Cut excess cable length, if necessary.
5. Connect the connector on the cable to the corresponding electrical
connector on the BG-20 or the xDDF-21.
6. Connect the connector on the other end of cable to the corresponding
electrical connector on the external DDF.

Routing and Connecting Data I nterface


Cables to Ethernet I nterfaces
Data cables with RJ-45 connectors are used to connect to FE interfaces on the
BG-20, including built-in FE interfaces on the BG-20B and FE interfaces on
the MEoP_4 module and the ESW_2G_8F_E card.
As part of the site preparations, Category 5 or better cables should be routed
from the relevant Ethernet DDF (if used) to the intended rack location and
connected to the RJ-45 connectors. Sufficient length should be available to
permit routing the cables to the appropriate level in the rack.

To conne ct da t a ca ble s t o a n Et he r ne t int e r fa ce :


1. Based on the site cabling diagram, route the data cables along the guides at
the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-20 unit.
2. Pull each data cable down to the level of the BG-20 unit.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack so
that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the BG-20 unit. Use
cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Connect the RJ-45 connector on the cable to the corresponding connector
on the BG-20 unit.

3-50 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Routing and Connecting Electrical Cables for


PCM I nterfaces
This section describes the connection of PCM interface electrical cables to the
VDF and ICPs.

Rou t in g a n d Con n e ct in g Ele ct r ica l Ca ble s for


PCM I n t e r fa ce s t o t h e VD F
Each type of SM_10E traffic module uses a SCSI-36 connector for its external
interfaces. An electrical cable with a SCSI-36 connector on one end and
another end that is open is used to connect each SM_10E traffic module to its
corresponding Voice-Frequency Distribution Frame (VDF), if ICPs are not
installed.

To conne ct PCM t r a ffic ca ble s t o t he VD F:


1. Arrange the PCM traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each PCM traffic cable down to the level of the SM_10E card.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening near the shelf until the cable connector is
positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to fasten
the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the SM_10E traffic module
connectors with the appropriate VDF connections.
5. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding connector on the
SM_10E traffic module front panel.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to


secure the cable connector, as this may damage the SM_10E
traffic module.

6. Secure the cable connector to the SM_10E traffic module connector with
the cable connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot
reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
screwdriver (maximum blade size is 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N
cm to 44 N cm.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-51


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Rou t in g a n d Con n e ct in g Ele ct r ica l Ca ble s for


PCM I n t e r fa ce s t o I CPs
To ease installation and connection to customer termination equipment, three
types of ICPs were developed. An electrical cable with SCSI-36 connectors on
both sides is used to connect an ICP to its corresponding SM_10E traffic
module. The same cable is used for any type of ICP.

To conne ct PCM t r a ffic ca ble s t o a n I CP:


1. Arrange the PCM traffic cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull one end of each PCM traffic cable to the level of the SM_10E card.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening near the shelf until the cable connector is
positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to fasten
the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the SM_10E traffic module
connectors with the appropriate ICP connections.
5. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding connector on the
SM_10E traffic module front panel.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to


secure the cable connector, as this may damage the SM_10E
traffic module.

6. Secure the cable connector to the SM_10E traffic module connector with
the cable connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot
reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
screwdriver (maximum blade size is 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N
cm to 44 N cm.
7. Pull the other end of each PCM traffic cable to the level of the ICP.
8. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening near the ICP until the cable connector is
positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to fasten
the cable to the rack side rails.

3-52 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

9. Connect the cable connector to the SCSI-36 connector on the ICP front
panel.
10. Secure the cable connector to the connector marked as J1 on the ICP front
panel with the cable connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you
cannot reach the screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade
screwdriver (maximum blade size is 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N
cm to 44 N cm.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to


secure the cable connector, as this may damage the ICP.

Rou t in g a n d Con n e ct in g Ele ct r ica l Ca ble s for


I CPs
Connectors on the ICP_VF panel for external interfaces are RJ-45 connectors.
Connectors on the ICP_V24 panel for external interfaces are 15-pin D-type
connectors and 9-pin D-type connectors. Connectors on the ICP_V35 panel for
external interfaces are M34 connectors. For a detailed description of the ICPs,
see the BroadGate BG-20 Reference Manual.
A VF cable is an electrical cable with an RJ-45 connector on one end and the
other end open. Each cable has six wires and can be used for one channel of the
following types of interfaces:
 FXO
 FXS
 2W
 4W
 2W E&M
 4W E&M
 Codirectional 64 Kbps
Different interface types can use different wires in this cable. Use the
information in Connection Data (see "Connection Data" on page A-1) to
identify the wires for each type of interface.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-53


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

To conne ct VF ca ble s t o t he I CP_ V F:


1. Route the VF cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate ICP_VF.
2. Connect the free end of the cable, in accordance with the rack installation
plan and the cable tags, to the RJ-45 connector on the ICP_VF front panel.
3. Cut excess cable length, if necessary.
4. Use the information in to identify the wires, according to the type of
interface.
5. Prepare the relevant connector on the other end, if necessary.
6. Connect the other end according to site installation plan.

To conne ct V.2 4 ca ble s t o I CP_ V2 4 :


1. Arrange the V.24 cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each V.24 cable to the level of the ICP_V24.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening near the shelf until the cable connector is
positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to fasten
the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the V.24 connectors with the
appropriate connections on the DDF or the customer’s termination
equipment.
5. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding connector on the
ICP_V24 front panel.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to


secure the cable connector, as this may damage the ICP.

6. Secure the cable connector to the ICP_V24 connector with the cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot reach the
screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size is 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.
7. Prepare the relevant connector on the other end, if necessary.
8. Connect the other end according to site installation plan.

3-54 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

To conne ct V.3 5 ca ble s t o t he I CP_ V3 5 :


1. Arrange the V.35 cables and route them to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each V.35 cable to the level of the ICP_V35.
3. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening near the shelf until the cable connector is
positioned against the appropriate place. Use cable ties as required to fasten
the cable to the rack side rails.
4. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate the V.35 connectors with the
appropriate connections on the customer’s termination equipment.
5. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding connector on the
ICP_V35 front panel.

CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to


secure the cable connector, as this may damage the ICP.

6. Secure the cable connector to the ICP_V35 connector with the cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually. If you cannot reach the
screws with your hands, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size is 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N
cm.
7. Prepare the relevant connector on the other end, if necessary.
8. Connect the other end according to site installation plan.

Connecting Tim ing ( Clock) Cables


Timing cables are connected to the T3/T4 RJ-45 connector on the BG-20B.

To conne ct a t im in g ca ble t o t h e BG- 2 0 B:


1. Route the timing cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate BG-
20B shelf.
2. Connect the free end of the cable, in accordance with the rack installation
plan and the cable tags, to the T3/T4 connector on the BG-20B front panel.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 3-55


Equ ipm e n t I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Connecting Orderw ire Cables


There are two orderwire cables, including:
 A cable with RJ-45 connectors on both sides, which is used to connect the
BG-OW to the BG-20B.
 A cable with RJ-11 connectors on both sides, which is used to connect the
OW handset to the BG-OW.

To conne ct a n RJ- 4 5 or de r w ir e ca ble :


1. Route the RJ-45 orderwire cable along the side of the rack from the
appropriate BG-20B shelf to the appropriate BG-OW box.
2. Connect one end of the cable, in accordance with the rack installation plan
and the cable tags, to the OW connector on the BG-20B front panel.
3. Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 connector marked as BG-
NE on the BG-OW front panel.

To conne ct a n RJ- 1 1 or de r w ir e ca ble :


1. Connect one end of the cable to the RJ-11 connector marked as HANDSET
on the BG-OW front panel.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-11 connector on the OW
handset.

3-56 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


4
Ope r a t ion

I n this chapter:
Commissioning Tests ...................................................................................... 4-1

Com m issioning Te st s
Commissioning tests are performed after completing the installation and
preliminary configuration of a new network. These procedures confirm that the
network has been properly installed and is operating in accordance with the
design specifications.
This chapter provides general commissioning procedures for the BG-20, and
provides a basis for preparing tests in specific networks.
The commissioning procedures include:
 Site commissioning tests, performed at the site level to ensure proper
functionality of the site
 SDH commissioning tests, performed at the network level to ensure proper
SDH functionality of the integrated network
 Data commissioning tests, performed at the network level to ensure proper
data functionality of the integrated network
The commissioning procedures presented in this chapter include:
 Test Equipment (on page 4-2)
 Site Commissioning Tests (Checking Cards and Modules Installed in Each
Shelf (on page 4-3), Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks (on page
4-4), Measuring Optical Levels (on page 4-5), Shelf Power-on Test
Procedure (on page 4-6)).

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4-1


Ope r a t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

 SDH Commissioning Tests (Network Timing Synchronization Test (on


page 4-9), Loss of Signal (LOS) Detection Test (on page 4-9), Input
Sensitivity Test (on page 4-10), Equipment Power-on Test (on page 4-10),
Traffic Stability Test (on page 4-11), Path Protection and Nonretrieval Test
(on page 4-11), Severity Assignment Test (on page 4-12), Transmission
Alarm-handling Tests (on page 4-13), Maintenance Action Tests (on page
4-14)).
 Data Network Commissioning Tests (Throughput and Latency Tests (on
page 4-15), System Recovery and Reset Tests (on page 4-16), Frame Loss-
Rate Test (on page 4-16), Stability Test (on page 4-17), Alarm-Handling
Test (on page 4-17)).

NOTE: Personnel involved in the execution and supervision


of commissioning tests must be familiar with the applicable
safety precautions and requirements.

Test Equipm ent


The following test equipment is required for the commissioning procedures:
 PDH transmission analyzer for testing PDH transmission performance
 SDH transmission analyzer for testing SDH transmission performance
 Data transmission test equipment for testing FE transmission performance
 Optical Power Meter (OPM)
 Set of optical attenuators with various values
 Variable optical attenuator
 FC-to-LC adapters
 LC/FC optical patch cords
 Multimeter
Suitable equipment is available from a wide range of manufacturers, and
therefore no specific test equipment models are listed. You can use any
equipment that meets the applicable international standards and has satisfactory
measurement accuracy over the range of operating parameters and
environmental conditions that apply to the specific network. If necessary,
contact ECI Telecom’s Field Engineering Department for specific
recommendations.

4-2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Ope r a t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Site Com m issioning Tests


Site commissioning tests verify the normal operation of BG-20 network
elements (NEs). Perform the following procedures on each NE at each site:
 Verify the cards and modules installed in each shelf
 Perform a visual inspection and mechanical checks
 Measure optical levels (see reference data in the BroadGate Product Line
General Description)

Ch e ck in g Ca r ds a n d M odu le s I n st a lle d in
Ea ch Sh e lf
This check is performed to confirm that the required cards and modules have
been installed in each site, and to record their options, revisions, boot version,
and serial numbers.
The following table provides a typical form for recording the cards and
modules installed in a BG-20 shelf.

Table 4-1: Card and module inventory

Card/module type Slot Option Revision Boot Serial


version number
MCP30 MS
XIO30_1 XS A

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4-3


Ope r a t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Visu a l I n spe ct ion a n d M e ch a n ica l Ch e ck s


The visual inspection checks for proper equipment installation, correct routing
and connection of cables, and other tasks related to equipment installation, as
follows:
 Equipment installation provides the criteria for proper equipment
installation.
 The site cabling diagram provides the criteria for proper cabling routing.
After completing the visual inspection tasks (items 1 through 18 in the
following table), power on the BG-20B shelf to perform an additional set of
acceptance tests (items 15 through 19 in the following table). These tests check
the functions needed for continuing the execution of the network
commissioning tests. Consult the BroadGate Product Line General Description
and the BG-20 Reference Manual for a description of the various card
indicators and their functions.
The following table provides a typical list for recording the results of a visual
inspection and mechanical check.

Table 4-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks

No. Description of inspection/check Results


1 Check mechanical mounting of the rack.
2 Check the BG-20B/BG-20E installation; make sure that the
rail stiffeners are properly installed.
3 Check the ODF and FST installation and fiber connection (if
applicable).
4 Check the DDF installation and relevant cable connections (if
applicable).
5 Check ICP_MCP30 installation and relevant cable
connections (if applicable).
6 Check the grounding cable connections.
7 Check the DC power cable connections (main fuse to RAP,
RAP fuse to BG-20B/BG-20E shelf).
8 Check the network manager station installation (if applicable).
9 Check the installation of modules and cards.
10 Check the connection of relevant cables or fibers for all cards
installed.
11 Provide DC supply voltage via the INF_30B/INF_30E on slot
PSA to the RAP (-40 V to -75 V).
12 Provide DC supply voltage via the INF_30B/INF_30E on slot
PSB to the RAP (-40 V to -75 V).

4-4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Ope r a t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

No. Description of inspection/check Results


13 Power on the shelf.
14 Check the proper operation of both RAP power sources by
disconnecting one source at a time.
15 Check the communication between the BG-20B shelf and the
LCT-BGF via the MNG Ethernet interface on the MCP30.
16 Check the proper operation of all fans.
17 Check LED operation using the LED TEST option in the
LCT-BGF.
18 Check slot assignment for all relevant cards and modules.
19 Check that there are no abnormal alarms.

M e a su r in g Opt ica l Le ve ls
These measurements check optical signal levels at the various equipment ports.
Before performing any other commissioning test, proper optical levels within
the limits specified in the BroadGate Product Line System Specifications must
be achieved for each optical component.
Perform these measurements using an OPM configured according to the
wavelength at the measurement port. For reliable measurement, do not connect
the OPM directly to a port but use a two-meter fiber. When measuring high
optical power levels, use attenuators to ensure that the power does not exceed
the maximum OPM input level.
The following table provides a typical data form for recording the results of the
optical level measurements.

Table 4-3: Measured optical levels

Slot Module type Port Wavelength Optical Receive level


transmit level (dBm)
(dBm)

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4-5


Ope r a t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

The measured power levels are evaluated as follows:


 The measured power must be within the range of minimum and maximum
levels specified in the BroadGate Product Line General Description for the
transceiver plug-in type installed on the corresponding port.
 The measured power must be within the expected range according to the
optical network plan.
It is usually sufficient to measure the optical levels only at the receive ports. A
good port-receive level indicates that the components in the optical path up to
that port are properly connected and operating normally. If the result is not
satisfactory, perform additional measurements at the transmit port in the remote
site.

Sh e lf Pow e r - on Te st Pr oce du r e
Follow the procedure below to test the BG-20 power-on process.

To pow e r on t he N E:
1. Perform slot assignments for all the relevant cards and modules in the shelf.
2. After 10 seconds, turn the shelf circuit breaker off.
3. After 30 seconds, turn the shelf circuit breaker on.
The equipment should automatically return to normal operation, without
user intervention and without any abnormal alarms in the system.

4-6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Ope r a t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

SDH Com m issioning Tests


These commissioning tests check that SDH functionality is in accordance with
the system specifications.

Te st Equ ipm e n t Se t u p
The SDH tests are performed using a PDH analyzer, OPM, and variable
attenuators. Configure the OPM according to the measured wavelength.
The test conditions for the various interfaces are described in the following
sections.

2 M bps t e st s

Table 4-4: 2 Mbps tests

Framing Unframed
Coding HDB3
Pattern 2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate 2 Mbps
Timing Internal clock
Inject error Code error

3 4 M bps t e st s

Table 4-5: 34 Mbps tests

Framing Unframed
Coding HDB3
Pattern 2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate 34 Mbps
Timing Internal clock
Inject error Code error

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4-7


Ope r a t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

4 5 M bps t e st s

Table 4-6: 45 Mbps tests

Framing Unframed
Coding B3ZS
Pattern 2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate 45 Mbps
Timing Internal clock
Inject error Code error

SD H t e st s

For SDH tests, configure the test equipment according to the interface type
being tested.

Table 4-7: SDH tests

Signal rate STM-1, STM-4


Mapping Any mapping (preferably bulk)
Pattern 2 * 10-15 PRBS
Signal rate 155.520 Mbps, 622.080 Mbps
Timing Received clock
Inject error BIP error

4-8 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Ope r a t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

N e t w or k Tim in g Syn ch r on iza t ion Te st


This test checks that the BG-20 NEs synchronize properly and switch to the
next priority clock source when a failure occurs.

To pe r for m a ne t w or k t im ing synchr oniza t ion t e st :


1. Define one NE as the (internal) timing source to which all other NEs are
synchronized. This test can be done with an external timing source, if
requested.
2. Define several priorities for the timing source.
3. Disconnect the Rx fiber connected to the NE defined as the main timing
source.
If the NE has two or more timing sources, it synchronizes to the second priority
source, and an alarm is generated for the missing main timing source.
If the NE has only one timing source, the NE timing is set as “hold-over” and
an alarm is generated for the main timing source. Another alarm is generated to
indicate that there is no available timing source.

Loss of Sign a l ( LOS) D e t e ct ion Te st


This test verifies that NEs recognize alarms and send an alarm notification to
the management system for viewing.

To pe r for m a n LOS de t e ct ion t e st :


1. Create NEs and links through the management system.
2. Disconnect the Rx optical fiber from one of the modules. An LOS alarm at
the SPI level of this module port appears, together with other alarms
generated by the disconnection.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4-9


Ope r a t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I n pu t Se n sit ivit y Te st
This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the BG-20 optical modules is
according to specification.

To pe r for m a n input se nsit ivit y t e st :


1. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE
(in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Connect a variable optical attenuator to one of the fibers of the relevant
trail, and set the attenuator to 0 dB.
4. Increase the attenuation gradually until the test equipment displays a burst
of errors.
5. Connect an OPM to the first Rx point after the variable optical attenuator
and measure the total power. The measured optical power level is the input
sensitivity of the module.
6. Verify that the results are in accordance with the BroadGate Product Line
System Specifications.

Equ ipm e n t Pow e r - on Te st


This test verifies that the BG-20 NEs continue operating properly after a power
break, without operator involvement.

To pe r for m a n e quipm e nt pow e r - on t e st :


1. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE
(in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Shut off the power to one of the nongateway NEs within the relevant trail.
Errors and an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) alarm appear in the test
equipment. After approximately seven minutes, an “NE disconnected”
alarm appears in the management system current alarm list, and the NE
icon turns gray (indicates no communication).
4. Power on the NE and wait for it to perform the initial download to all
cards/modules in the shelf. This can take five minutes.
5. Verify that the NE is connected to the management station and that there
are no relevant alarms in the test equipment or at the management station.

4-10 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Ope r a t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Tr a ffic St a bilit y Te st
This test verifies that traffic operates according to ITU-T standards.

To pe r for m a t r a ffic st a bilit y t e st :


1. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE
(in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Run this test for the appropriate time interval according to the following
table.
4. Verify that no alarms appear in the test equipment or at the management
station. You should achieve an error-free rate of 1 x 10-11 for 2 Mbps and
1 x 10-12 for all other rates.

Table 4-8: Traffic stability test time intervals

2 Mbps 34/45 Mbps STM-1/VC-3 STM-4/VC-12


14 hours 7 hours 120 minutes 30 minutes

Pa t h Pr ot e ct ion a n d N on r e t r ie va l Te st
This test verifies that SNCP traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.

To pe r for m a pa t h pr ot e ct ion a n d nonr e t r ie va l t e st :


1. Create one protected trail of any rate between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE
(in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Disconnect one of the fibers in the active path of the trail. Short alarm
bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the
management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail.
4. Verify that the trail works properly on the protection path.
5. Reconnect the optical fiber. The trail remains on the protection path
(nonretrieve mode), and there is no alarm in the test equipment.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4-11


Ope r a t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Se ve r it y Assign m e n t Te st
This test, which is performed on one BG-20 NE, determines the level of
urgency accorded to each alarm and creates an alarm-handling protocol.
When a fault is detected or removed, the NE updates the status of the LEDs and
reports the alarm activation or clearing to the management station.

To pe r for m a se ve r it y a ssign m e nt t e st :
1. Disconnect a fiber from one of the optical interfaces. An SPI LOS alarm of
critical severity appears on the management station for the BG-20 and the
MJR LED on the BG-20B panel is on.
2. Reconnect the fiber. The SPI LOS alarm on the management station clears
and the MJR LED on the BG-20B panel is off (only if there are no other
alarms on the BG-20 unit).
3. Change the severity of the SPI LOS alarm to minor.
4. Disconnect a fiber from one of the optical interfaces. An SPI LOS alarm of
minor severity appears on the management station for the BG-20 and the
MNR LED on the BG-20B panel is on (only if there is no critical or major
alarm on the BG-20 unit).
5. Reconnect the fiber. The SPI LOS alarm on the management station clears
and the MNR LED on the BG-20B panel is off (only if there is no other
alarm on the BG-20 unit).

4-12 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Ope r a t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Tr a n sm ission Ala r m - H a n dlin g Te st s


This test verifies that the BG-20 NEs can recognize an alarm and send an alarm
notification to the management system, and that the management system
displays it properly.
This procedure tests the following alarms: PDH-LOS, PDH-AIS, and SPI-LOS.

To pe r for m a t r a nsm ission a la r m - ha n dling t e st :


1. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs.
2. Connect PDH test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the
other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Disconnect the Tx cable of the test equipment. The management station
reports an LOS alarm for the relevant PDH port.
4. Set the test equipment to transmit an AIS (AIS = on). The management
station reports an AIS alarm for the relevant PDH port.
5. Disconnect the Rx fiber of an optical port. The management station reports
an LOS (SPI-LOS) alarm for the relevant optical port.
If ALS = off, the management station reports a far-end optical port MS-
RDI alarm.

If ALS = on, the management station reports a far-end optical port LOS
alarm.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4-13


Ope r a t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

M a in t e n a n ce Act ion Te st s
This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the BG-20 NEs
using the management system.
This procedure tests a near-end loopback, forced PDH AIS, forced low-rate
RDI, forced high-rate RDI, and forced MS-RDI.

To pe r for m m a int e na nce a ct ion t e st s:


1. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to one NE. The PDH test equipment detects an AIS
alarm.
3. Perform a near-end loopback at the other trail endpoint. The AIS alarm in
the PDH test equipment clears, and no alarm or error remains on the PDH
test equipment.
4. Using the management station, execute a forced AIS on the PDH port that
connects to the test equipment. The PDH test equipment detects an AIS
alarm.
5. Using the management station, execute a forced low-rate RDI (or forced
high-rate RDI or forced MS-RDI) on a BG-20 shelf. Another BG-20 shelf
reports a low-rate RDI (or high-rate RDI or MS-RDI) to the management
station.

4-14 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Ope r a t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Data Netw ork Com m issioning Tests


The data network commissioning tests check that data functionality is in
accordance with system specifications.

Th r ou gh pu t a n d La t e n cy Te st s
These tests determine the time it takes to transmit frames through the network,
and the maximum amount of data that can pass through the network before
frames are lost.

To pe r for m t hr ou ghpu t a nd la t e ncy t e st s:


1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate between two NEs in the
network.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect two ports of
the other NE through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for RFC-2544 throughput and latency
measurement.
4. Measure the throughput and latency for frame sizes 64, 128, 256, 512,
1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes, and record the results in the appropriate table.

NOTES:
 Measured latency is for both the forward and return paths.
For a single path, the latency will be 50% of the measured
value.
 The latency test is dependent on the throughput results.
For example, if 10 Mbps is tested and the throughput is
4%, the latency test should be for 4 Mbps (2 * VC-12 = 4
Mbps).
 Inject traffic according to the assigned bandwidth (VC-12
= 2.048 Mbps).

Table 4-9: Throughput and latency test results


LAN port and 64 bytes/ 128 256 512 1024 bytes/ 1280 bytes/ 1518 bytes/
speed frame bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ frame frame frame
frame frame frame
Throughput

Latency

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4-15


Ope r a t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Syst e m Re cove r y a n d Re se t Te st s
These tests determine the speed at which a device recovers from a buffer
overflow condition or from a power failure.

To pe r for m syst e m r e cove r y a nd r e se t t e st s:


1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate (for example, 10/100
Mbps) between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect two ports of
the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports) through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate
and for any frame size.
4. Power off one of the NEs and verify packet loss in the test equipment.
5. Turn on the NE, wait five minutes, and verify that the errors in the test
equipment have cleared.

Fr a m e Loss- Ra t e Te st
This test determines the number of frames that are lost when the system is
overloaded.

To pe r for m a fr a m e loss- r a t e t e st :
1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect two ports of
the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports) through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for RFC-2544 for frame loss measurements.
Set to 100%.
The frame loss rate in % is defined according to the following formula:

[(input fps) - (output fps)] * 100 / (input fps)

fps = frames per second

For example, for a 100 Mbps test using 5 * VC-12 = 10 Mbps, with input
fps = 148810 and output fps = 14881, the frame loss is:

148810 - 14881 = 133929, which represents 90% loss.

4-16 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Ope r a t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table 4-10: Frame loss-rate test results


Frame size 64 bytes/ 128 256 512 1024 bytes/ 1280 1518 bytes/
frame bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ frame bytes/ frame
frame frame frame frame
Frame rate
(% MFR)100%

St a bilit y Te st
This test determines the stability of the network by checking that it can
function with no errors for a defined period of time.

To pe r for m a st a bilit y t e st :
1. Create two unprotected Ethernet trails of any rate (for example,
10/100 Mbps) between two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect two ports of
the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports) through an Ethernet cable.
3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate
and for any frame size.
4. Set the transmit rate in the test equipment to about 90% of the trail
bandwidth.
5. Run this test for two hours, and verify that no errors appear in the test
equipment.

Ala r m - H a n dlin g Te st
This test checks the alarm conditions forced on the NE and the subsequent
action carried out by the NE. It tests signal loss to both the data LAN port and
to the optical interfaces.

To pe r for m a n a la r m - ha ndling t e st :
1. Create two Ethernet trails of any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps) between
two NEs.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect two ports of
the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports) through an Ethernet cable.
3. Disconnect the test equipment to create a signal loss to the data LAN port.
This generates a 10/100 Mbps - Link Down alarm.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4-17


Ope r a t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

4-18 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


5
M a in t e n a n ce

I n this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 5-1
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials ............................................. 5-1
Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................. 5-2
Onsite Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 5-3
Troubleshooting Power Problems ................................................................... 5-4
Troubleshooting Using Component Indicators ................................................ 5-5
Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 5-22

Ove r vie w
This chapter provides maintenance procedures for BG-20 equipment.
Personnel involved in maintenance must be thoroughly familiar with safety
issues, as described in Before You Start.

Re qu ir e d Te st Equipm e n t , Tools,
a nd M a t e r ia ls
For most maintenance activities described in this chapter, only an LCT-BGF
terminal and a multimeter are required. If you need to make measurements, it is
recommended to use equipment of the same type and models used for
commissioning tests. For more information, see Commissioning Tests (on page
4-1). The tools and materials necessary for equipment installation must also be
available during maintenance.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-1


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pr e ve nt ive M a int e na nce


The purpose of the preventive maintenance activities is to keep the BG-20
hardware in good condition, and detect and correct as soon as possible any
condition that may lead to deterioration and equipment malfunction.
Record the execution of the various activities and their results according to the
procedures used in your organization

Table 5-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks

Item Inspection/check Intervals*


W M Q
1 Visually inspect the condition of cables and fibers. Check X
for correct routing (no sharp bends) and proper support to
avoid stress. Avoid touching fibers during the inspection,
except as required to correct problems.
2 Inspect equipment racks and cases, connection terminals, X
grounding, and so on, and pay special attention to any
signs of corrosion.
3 Check the condition of rack front doors and RFI fingers. X
Clean as necessary with approved cleaning agents.
4 Whenever applicable, inspect ancillary equipment (air X
conditioners, lighting, distribution panels, and so on) and
their power sources.
5 Check that all unused optical connectors are covered by X
protective covers. Add covers as necessary.
6 Check that cards and modules are securely attached. All X
module fastening screws must be tight (tighten only
manually).
7 Check for proper operation of the fans (no abnormal noise X
and vibrations) in all NEs.
8 Clean all areas around the shelf in the rack and the rack’s X
front door (if applicable) using a vacuum cleaner.
9 Check that the cables connecting the DC power sources X
(main and backup) to the RAP are properly connected.
10 Check that the external alarm cables are properly X
connected to the RAP.
11 Check that there are no alarm indications on the cards and X
modules.

5-2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Item Inspection/check Intervals*


W M Q
12 Check that all RAP LEDs turn on and that the buzzer X
sounds while the POWER ON pushbutton on the RAP
panel is pressed.
13 Check that all card and module LEDs turn on when X
performing the LED TEST operation using the LCT-BGF.
Note: LEDs for FE interfaces and LEDs for Laser On
indications are not covered by the LED test operation.
14 Perform a visual check of LED indications. X
15 Check the proper operation of the orderwire (OW) system
(if applicable to the NE).

* Legend: W weekly M monthly Q quarterly

Onsit e Tr ouble shoot ing


The purpose of onsite troubleshooting is to identify the hardware causing the
malfunction and return the equipment to normal operation as soon as possible.
Troubleshooting is usually initiated in response to one of the following
conditions:
 Alarm or performance degradation reported by the management station.
 Alarm or malfunction detected onsite by maintenance personnel, either as a
result of a troubleshooting activity initiated by the management center
personnel or as a result of a periodic inspection or preventive maintenance
action. Many problems can be detected via the various indicators available
on the BG-20 system components.
This chapter assumes familiarity with the BG-20, with SDH data, and with the
LightSoft and EMS-BGF management stations. Refer to the respective user
manual for details on the various capabilities of the management stations, and
for instructions on performing the necessary activities.
The following sections provide procedures for performing onsite
troubleshooting for various trouble categories. For each category, you will find
a troubleshooting table that provides the instructions for identifying the trouble.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-3


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

To use t he t r ouble shoot ing t a ble :


1. Identify the closest description of the trouble symptoms under
“Symptoms”.
2. Perform the required corrective actions listed under “Corrective actions” in
the order they appear, until the trouble is corrected.

Tr ouble shoot ing Pow e r


Pr oble m s
Table 5-2: Troubleshooting power problems

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 RAP Both main and  Check the site power distribution
POWER backup power system.
ON sources failed  Check the DC voltage at the main and
indicator off backup power terminals of the RAP.
 If the voltage is not within the correct
range, check cable connections up to
the DC power distribution panel and
make sure no fuses are blown.
 Check the voltage supplied by the main
and backup power sources.
 Check the power connections to the
RAP.
 Check the circuit breakers in the RAP
and replace if necessary.
Equipment  Check the voltage at the BG-20B, BG-
problem 20E, and BG-OW end of each power
cable. Replace the cable or repair the
RAP if there is no voltage present.
 Check and reconnect cables to the
equipment, one by one. If the circuit
breaker trips again when connecting a
specific unit, replace that unit.

5-4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


All LEDs No input power to  Check the corresponding circuit breaker
and fans in the corresponding in the RAP, and reset any tripped
BG-20B off unit breaker.
 Check the circuit breakers in the RAP
and replace if necessary.
 If the circuit breaker trips again,
disconnect the cable protected by the
corresponding circuit breaker from the
equipment and check the voltage
polarity.
 Check the power cable condition and
make sure the cable is not damaged and
does not cause short circuits.
 Check proper cable connection at both
ends.

Tr ouble shoot ing Using


Com pon e n t I n dica t or s
The management station will usually provide onsite personnel with a list of
suspected components.
Start the troubleshooting of a suspected component by checking its indicators.
These indicators, located on the various cards and modules, can help you to
rapidly and efficiently identify a malfunctioning component in accordance with
the procedures outlined in the following tables.

NOTE: For a description of indicator functions, see the


BroadGate BG-20 Reference Manual.

CAUTION: The following corrective actions are traffic-


affecting.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-5


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table 5-3: General troubleshooting procedures for BG-20B/BG-20C power-on

Symptom Probable cause Corrective actions


Indicators on MXC20 panel
FAIL ACT MJR MNR
Off Blink Off Boot selection  Power off and wait a few
non-existent or minutes before powering on
hardware fault again.
 Wait a minute at most. The
ACT indicator should flash and
the FAIL indicator should be
off. If not, replace the BG-20B
unit.
On Off Off Off BIT of SDRAM  Power off and wait a few
failed minutes before powering on
again.
 Wait a minute at most. The
ACT indicator should flash and
the FAIL indicator should be
off. If not, replace the BG-20B
unit.
On Off On Off Boot code not  Power off and wait a few
found by boot minutes before powering on
selection again.
 Wait a minute at most. The
ACT indicator should flash and
the FAIL indicator should be
off. If not, replace the BG-20B
unit.
On Off Off Off BIT of SDRAM  Power off and wait a few
failed minutes before powering on
again.
 Wait a minute at most. The
ACT indicator should flash and
the FAIL indicator should be
off. If not, replace the BG-20B
unit.
On Off Off On BIT of Flash  Power off and wait a few
failed minutes before powering on
again.
 Wait a minute at most. The
ACT indicator should flash and
the FAIL indicator should be
off. If not, replace the BG-20B
unit.

5-6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Symptom Probable cause Corrective actions


Indicators on MXC20 panel
FAIL ACT MJR MNR
On Blink Blink Blink Illogical  Reset the card. When the ACT
parameters, such indicator is off and the MNR
as the ID or indicator flashes after reset,
gateway modify the incorrect parameters
using the Boot Configuration
Tool.
 After incorrect parameters are
modified correctly, reset the
card again. The ACT indicator
should flash and the FAIL
indicator should be off after
resetting.
 If the FAIL indicator remains
on, replace the BG-20B unit.
On Blink Blink Off Nonexecutable  Power off and wait a few
application minutes before powering on
software again.
 When the ACT indicator is off
and the MNR indicator flashes
after power-on, download the
embedded software using the
Boot Configuration Tool.
 After the embedded software is
completely downloaded to the
card, power off and then power
on the card again. The ACT
indicator should flash and the
FAIL indicator should be off
after power-on if the problem is
due to a damaged software
bank.
 If the FAIL indicator remains
on, replace the BG-20B unit.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-7


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Symptom Probable cause Corrective actions


Indicators on MXC20 panel
FAIL ACT MJR MNR
On On On On Unsuccessfully  Power off and wait a few
executed minutes before powering on
application again.
software  When the ACT indicator is off
and the MNR indicator flashes
after power-on, download the
embedded software using the
Boot Configuration Tool.
 After the embedded software is
completely downloaded to the
card, power off and then power
on the card again. The ACT
indicator should flash and the
FAIL indicator should be off
after power-on if the problem is
due to a damaged software
bank.
 If the FAIL indicator remains
on, replace the BG-20B unit.
Blink Blink Blink Blink FPGA file on  Power off and wait a few
MXC20 minutes before powering on
downloaded again.
unsuccessfully  When the ACT indicator is off
and the MNR indicator flashes
after power-on, download the
embedded software package
using the Boot Configuration
Tool.
 After the embedded software
package is completely
downloaded to the card, power
off and then power on the card
again. The ACT indicator
should flash and the FAIL
indicator should be off after
power-on if the problem is due
to a damaged software bank.
 If the FAIL indicator remains
on, replace the BG-20B unit.

5-8 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Symptom Probable cause Corrective actions


Indicators on MXC20 panel
FAIL ACT MJR MNR
Blink Blink Blink Off BG-20B  Power off and wait a few
initializes minutes before powering on
unsuccessfully again.
 Wait a minute at most. The
ACT indicator should flash and
the FAIL indicator should be
off. If not, replace the BG-20B
unit.

Table 5-4: General troubleshooting procedures for MXC20

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 Green ACT indicator Damaged software or  Perform a warm reset on
not flashing, and the defective card the BG-20B by pressing
status always on the RST button.
 If the ACT indicator starts
to flash, keep watching for
five minutes to ensure that
the problem has been
solved.
 If the ACT indicator does
not flash, reset the BG-20B
using the LCT-BGF and
download the embedded
software using the Boot
Configuration Tool.
 If the ACT indicator starts
to flash, keep watching for
five minutes to ensure that
the problem has been
solved.
 If the ACT indicator does
not flash, power-off the
BG-20B and wait a minute
before powering it on.
 Consult the previous table,
"General troubleshooting
procedures for BG-20B
power-on" for guidance in
resolving the problem.
2 Green ACT indicator Defective indicator Select Maintenance > LED
not flashing, and the Test in the LCT-BGF menu,
status always off and check that the indicator
blinks for some time. If not,
replace the card/module.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-9


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


3 Red FAIL indicator Damaged software or  Perform a warm reset on
on or not turning off defective card the BG-20B by pressing
after power-on and the RST button.
resetting  If the FAIL indicator is on,
reset the BG-20B using the
LCT-BGF and download
the embedded software
using the Boot
Configuration Tool.
 If the Fail indicator is on,
power-off the BG-20B and
wait a minute before
powering it on.
 Consult the previous table,
"General troubleshooting
procedures for BG-20B
power-on" for guidance in
resolving the problem.
4 Left green LED in Link down or defective  No trail on the
the P1-P6 RJ-45 off indicator corresponding Ethernet
ports indicates a normal
state.
 If there are trails on the
corresponding Ethernet
ports, check whether there
are SSF or CSF alarms in
the corresponding Ethernet
trails. If yes, try to find the
reason for the SSF or CSF
problems and solve them,
and check the link status
again.
 Make sure the cable
connected to the
corresponding port is not
damaged. Connect the
cable to an Ethernet
analyzer. If a normal signal
is detected, the indicator is
defective or the port is
unavailable. Replace the
BG-20B unit.

5-10 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


5 Right orange LED in 10 Mbps link or  Check the port attributes in
the P1-P6 RJ-45 off defective indicator the LCT-BGF. If the speed
status is 10 Mbps, it is in
normal state.
 If the speed status in the
LCT-BGF is 100 Mbps, the
BG-20B or indicator is
defective. Replace the BG-
20B unit.

Table 5-5: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins

Symptom Probable cause Corrective actions


Green transceiver SFP module damage  On the LCT-BGF, if the SFP
Laser On indicator off type cannot be successfully
obtained, the IDPROM of the
SFP module may be damaged.
Replace the module.
 If the SFP type information is
consistent with the expected
SFP type, force the laser on
through the LCT-BGF. The
laser on indicator should be on.
If not, the SFP module or the
optical module is damaged.
Replace the damaged module.
Incorrect  On the LCT-BGF, check
configuration whether there is an SFP-type-
mismatch alarm in the
corresponding optical interface.
 If yes, check the expected SFP
type first. Correct it if it is not
correct.
 Then, check the SFP module
type. If it is not the same as the
expected SFP type, replace the
SFP module with the proper
type.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-11


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Symptom Probable cause Corrective actions


Corresponding optical  Check that all the fibers are
transmitter may have properly connected to the
been turned off by the corresponding optical
ALS function (see the transceiver.
following note)  When available, select
Maintenance > Laser
Management > Laser Switch >
Force Laser On in the LCT-
BGF to activate the
corresponding laser.
 Use an OPM to measure the
output optical power. If the
output optical power is not
within the range of minimum
and maximum levels specified
in the BG-20 System
Specifications during a 90-
second period, the problem is in
the transmit side of the
transceiver. Remove and
reinsert the transceiver.
 Check the output optical power
again. If the output optical
power is still not within the
range of minimum and
maximum levels specified in the
BG-20 System Specifications,
replace the transceiver.
 If the problem persists, check
the receive optical power with
an OPM. If the optical power is
within the range of minimum
and maximum levels specified
in the BG-20 System
Specifications, replace the
transceiver.
 If the problem persists after
following the previous steps,
check the remote site.
 If there are no problems on both
sites, the problem may be in the
optical fiber between the two
sites.
NOTE: Be sure to turn on the ALS
function after performing all checks.

5-12 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

NOTE: An optical port with ALS capability turns off its


transmitter when the corresponding receive signal is lost.
Turning the transmitter off may cause a chain reaction, which
turns the optical signals off in a whole section of the network
and generates a large number of alarms. As a result, it may be
difficult to identify the real cause of the problem, and you
may need to use the management station log records to
identify the port.

Table 5-6: Troubleshooting procedures for M345_3 cards

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 Green ACT Defective indicator Select Maintenance > LED Test in the
indicator off LCT-BGF menu and check that the
indicator blinks for some time. If not,
replace the module.
FPGA in module  Power off and wait a few minutes
downloaded before powering on again.
unsuccessfully  If the Green ACT is still off,
download and activate the NE
embedded software package either
through the LCT-BGF or Boot
Configuration Tool.
 After the new embedded software
package is activated, the ACT
indicator should be on and the FAIL
indicator should be off.
 If the ACT indicator is still off,
replace the module.
 If the ACT indicator is still off,
replace the BG-20B unit.
Defective module  If the ACT indicator is still off,
replace the module.
 If the ACT indicator is still off,
replace the BG-20B unit.
2 Red FAIL Defective  The FAIL indicator is turned on
indicator on card/module during running if a BIT fail is
or not turning detected. Check the BIT codes using
off after the LCT-BGF and write them down.
power-on and  Cold reset the module. If the FAIL
reset indicator turns on again after
running, replace the module.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-13


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


3 Orange mode Corresponding port Check with the management station
indicator off configured to E3 operator to determine whether the
module has already been configured for
DS-3. If not, ignore the state of the
Mode indicator.
Defective indicators If the port is in DS-3 mode, the indicator
should be on. If not, replace the module.

Table 5-7: Troubleshooting procedures for ME1_21/ME1_21H/ME1_42/ME1_42H


cards

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 Green ACT Defective indicator Select Maintenance > LED Test in
indicator off the LCT-BGF menu and check that
the indicator blinks for some time. If
not, replace the module.
FPGA in module  Power off and wait a few minutes
downloaded before powering on again.
unsuccessfully  If the Green ACT indicator is still
off, download and activate the
NE embedded software package
either through the LCT-BGF or
Boot Configuration Tool.
 After the new embedded software
package is activated, the ACT
indicator should be on and the
FAIL indicator should be off.

Defective module  If the ACT indicator is still off,


replace the module.
 If the ACT indicator is still off,
replace the BG-20B unit.
2 Red FAIL Defective  Perform a warm reset on the BG-
indicator on or card/module 20B by pushing the RST button.
not turning off  If the FAIL indicator is on after
after power-on reset, download and activate the
and reset NE embedded software package
either through the LCT-BGF or
Boot Configuration Tool.
 After the software is completely
downloaded to the BG-20B, the
ACT indicator should be on and
the FAIL indicator should be off.
 If the FAIL indicator turns on
again, replace the module.

5-14 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table 5-8: Troubleshooting procedures for SMD1/SMD1H/OMS4B/OMS4H cards

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 Green ACT Defective indicator Select Maintenance > LED Test in the
indicator off LCT-BGF menu and check that the
indicator blinks for some time. If not,
replace the module.
FPGA in module  Power off and wait a few minutes
downloaded before powering on again.
unsuccessfully  If the Green ACT indicator is still off,
download and activate the NE
embedded software package either
through the LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
 After the new embedded software
package is activated, the ACT
indicator should be on and the FAIL
indicator should be off.
Defective module  If the ACT indicator is still off, replace
the module.
 If the ACT indicator is still off, replace
the BG-20B unit.
2 Red FAIL Damaged software  Perform a warm reset on the BG-20B
indicator on or defective by pushing the RST button.
or not card/module  If the FAIL indicator is on after reset,
turning off download and activate the NE
after power- embedded software package either
on and reset through the LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
 After the software is completely
downloaded to the BG-20B, the ACT
indicator should be on and the FAIL
indicator should be off.
 If the FAIL indicator turns on again,
replace the module.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-15


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table 5-9: General troubleshooting procedures for MEoP_4 cards

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 Green ACT Defective Select Maintenance > LED Test in the
indicator off ndicator LCT-BGF menu and check that the
indicator blinks for some time. If not,
replace the module.
FPGA in  Power off and wait a few minutes
module before powering on again.
downloaded  If the Green ACT indicator is still off,
unsuccessfully download and activate the NE
embedded software package either
through the LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
 After the new embedded software
package is activated, the ACT
indicator should be on and the FAIL
indicator should be off.
Defective  If the ACT indicator is still off, replace
module the module.
 If the ACT indicator is still off, replace
the BG-20B unit.
2 Red FAIL Damaged  Perform a warm reset on the BG-20B
indicator on or software or by pushing the RST button.
not turning off defective  If the FAIL indicator is on after reset,
after power-on card/module download and activate the NE
and reset embedded software package either
through the LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
 After the software is completely
downloaded to the BG-20B, the ACT
indicator should be on and the FAIL
indicator should be off.
 If the FAIL indicator turns on again,
replace the module.

5-16 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


3 Right green Link down or  No trail on the corresponding Ethernet
LED in the FE defective ports indicates a normal state.
P1~FE-P4 RJ- indicator  If there are trails on the corresponding
45 off Ethernet ports, check whether there is
a CSF alarm in the corresponding
Ethernet trails.
 If yes, try to find the reason for the
CSF problem and resolve it, and check
the link status again.
 Make sure the cable connected to the
corresponding port is not damaged.
 Connect the cable to an Ethernet
analyzer. If a normal signal is detected,
the indicator is defective or the port is
unavailable. Replace the card.
4 Left orange 10 Mbps link or  Check the port attributes in the LCT-
LED in the FE defective BGF. If the speed status is 10 Mbps, it
P1~FE-P4 RJ indicator is in normal state.
45 off  If the speed status in the LCT-BGF is
100 Mbps, the BG-20B or indicator is
defective. Replace the card.

Table 5-10: General troubleshooting procedures for extended cards


PE1_63/P345_3E/SM_10E/ESW_2G_8F_E)

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 Both red FAIL Boot damaged Extract the card and reinsert it into the
indicator and extended slot on the BG-20E. If this does
red Alarm not resolve the problem, replace the
indicator do not module.
turn off after
power-on
2 Green ACT Defective Select Maintenance > LED Test in the
indicator off indicator LCT-BGF menu and check that the
indicator blinks for some time. If not,
replace the module.
FPGA in  Power off and wait a few minutes
module before powering on again.
downloaded  If the Green ACT indicator is still off,
unsuccessfully download and activate the NE
embedded software package either
through the LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
 After the new embedded software
package is activated, the ACT
indicator should be on and the FAIL
indicator should be off.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-17


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


Defective  If the ACT indicator is still off, replace
module the module.
 If the ACT indicator is still off, replace
the BG-20B unit.
3 Red FAIL Embedded  Power off and wait a few minutes
indicator on or software and before powering on again.
not turning off FPGA not  If the Red FAIL indicator is still on,
after power-on downloaded download and activate the NE
and reset embedded software package either
through the LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
 After the new embedded software
package is activated, the ACT
indicator should be on and the FAIL
indicator should be off.
Damaged  Perform a warm reset on the BG-20B
software or by pushing the RST button.
defective  If the FAIL indicator is on after reset,
card/module download and activate the NE
embedded software package either
through the LCT-BGF or the Boot
Configuration Tool.
 After the software is completely
downloaded to the BG-20B, the ACT
indicator should be on and the FAIL
indicator should be off.
 If the FAIL indicator turns on again,
replace the module.

Table 5-11: Special troubleshooting procedures for P345_3E cards

No Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 Orange mode Corresponding port Check with the management station
indicator off configured to E3 operator to determine whether the module
has already been configured for DS-3. If
not, ignore the state of the Mode indicator.
Defective indicators If the port is in DS-3 mode, the indicator
should be on. If not, replace the module.

5-18 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table 5-12: Special troubleshooting procedures for ESW_2G_8F_E cards

No Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 Right green Link down or  No trail on the corresponding
LED in the defective indicator Ethernet ports indicates a normal
FE-P1~FE-P8 state.
RJ-45 off  If there are trails on the
corresponding Ethernet ports, check
whether there is a CSF alarm in the
corresponding Ethernet trails.
 If yes, try to find the reason for the
CSF problems and resolve it, and
check the link status again.
 Make sure the cable connected to the
corresponding port is not damaged.
 Connect the cable to an Ethernet
analyzer. If a normal signal is
detected, the indicator is defective or
the port is unavailable. Replace the
card.
2 Left orange 10 Mbps link or  Check the port attributes in the LCT-
LED in the defective indicator BGF. If the speed status is 10 Mbps,
FE-P1~FE-P8 it is in normal state.
RJ- 45 off  If the speed status in the LCT-BGF
is 100 Mbps, the BG-20B or
indicator is defective. Replace the
card.
3 Green SFP module  On the LCT-BGF, if the SFP type
transceiver damaged cannot be successfully obtained, the
Laser of GE- IDPROM of the SFP module may be
LAN indicator damaged. Replace the SFP module.
off  If the SFP type information is
consistent with the expected SFP
type, force the laser on through the
LCT-BGF. The laser on indicator
should be on. If not, the SFP module
or the optical module is damaged.
Replace the damaged module.

Incorrect  On the LCT-BGF, check whether


configuration there is an SFP-type-mismatch alarm
in the corresponding optical
interface.
 If yes, check the expected SFP type
first. Correct it if it is not right.
 Then check the SFP module type. If
it is not the same as the expected
SFP type, replace the SFP module
with the proper type.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-19


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table 5-13: General troubleshooting procedures for daughterboards on SM_10E


cards

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 Green ACT Defective indicator  Check whether the SM_10E card is
indicator off or defective running, meaning that the ACT LED
after power- daughterboard is blinking. If yes, extract the
on or reset daughterboard and reinsert it again.
 If the Green ACT indicator does not
turn on too, replace the
daughterboard.
Defective Dslot on If replacing the daughterboard does not
SM_10E resolve the problem, replace the SM_10E
card.
2 Red FAIL BIT fail Replace the module.
indicator on
after power-
on or reset

Table 5-14: Special troubleshooting procedures for SM_EOP daughterboards

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 Left green Link down or  No trail on the corresponding
LED in the defective indicator Ethernet ports indicates a normal
Port 1 or state.
Port 2 RJ-45  If there are trails on the corresponding
off Ethernet ports, check whether there is
a CSF alarm in the corresponding
Ethernet trails.
 If yes, try to find the reason for the
CSF problem and resolve it, and
check the link status again.
 Make sure the cable connected to the
corresponding port is not damaged.
 Connect the cable to an Ethernet
analyzer. If a normal signal is
detected, the indicator is defective or
the port is unavailable. Replace the
card.
2 Right orange 10 Mbps link or  Check the port attributes in the
LED in the defective indicator LCT-BGF. If the speed status is
Port 1 or 10 Mbps, it is in normal state.
Port 2 RJ-45  If the speed status in the LCT-BGF is
off 100 Mbps, the indicator is defective.
Replace the card.

5-20 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table 5-15: Special troubleshooting procedures for OW box

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


1 Green ACT indicator Power failure  Power off and wait a few
off minutes before powering
on again.
 If the indicator is still off,
replace the OW box
Defective indicator Select Maintenance > LED
Test in the LCT-BGF menu,
and check that the indicator
blinks for some time. If not,
replace the OW box.
2 Both ACT and Fail S/W on OW box is Replace OW box
Indicators blink damaged
3 Red FAIL indicator Connection between  Check the alarms on the
is on OW and BG-20B OW through LCT-BGF.
failure or faulty OW  If there is Card-out alarm,
box check the connection
between BG-20B and the
OW box, and try to solve it
by reconnecting the cable
or replacing the cable.
 If there is a BIT-fail alarm,
replace the OW box.

Defective indicator Select Maintenance > LED


Test in the LCT-BGF menu,
and check that the indicator
blinks for some time. If not,
replace the OW box.
4 Green In Use OW phone is not in use  If the OW phone is on
indicator is off hook, the indicator should
be off, it is normal. Pick
the phone up, the indicator
should be on.
Defective indicator Select Maintenance > LED
Test in the LCT-BGF menu,
and check that the indicator
blinks for some time. If not,
replace the OW box.
5 Green NET A OW not working on Check if OW is working on
indicator off Group A group A. If not, ignore the state
of the indicator.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-21


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions


Defective indicator Select Maintenance > LED
Test in the LCT-BGF menu,
and check that the indicator
blinks for some time. If not,
replace the OW box.
6 Green NET B OW not working on Check if OW is working on
indicator off Group B group B. If not, ignore the state
of the indicator.
Defective indicator Select Maintenance > LED
Test in the LCT-BGF menu,
and check that the indicator
blinks for some time. If not,
replace the OW box.

Re pla cin g Ca r ds a nd M odu le s

Safety and W orkm anship


Refer to Before You Start for safety and workmanship instructions.

CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices

PROPER HANDLING AND GROUNDING


PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED

BG-20 equipment contains components sensitive to


electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent ESD damage,
strictly observe all the precautions listed in Protection Against
ESD (on page 2-25). Keep parts and cards in their antistatic
packaging material until you are ready to install them.

Use an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded


equipment frame or rack when handling cards and modules
during installation, removing, or connecting to internal
connectors

5-22 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Be for e you st a r t :
When inserting cards and modules, be sure to carefully align the card or
module with the shelf guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion,
immediately retract the card/module and then repeat the process.
Hold the card/module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it
slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent
cards/modules.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening screws of cards and
modules.
Visually inspect the card and the mating backplane connectors and make sure
that there are no signs of physical damage. In particular, check for bent
connector pins.

Be for e r e pla cing a ny ca r d, m odule , or opt ica l t r a nsce ive r :


1. Check that the replacement component has not been physically damaged
during shipment.
2. Remove the replacement component from its antistatic protection
packaging, and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during
shipment. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware and software versions as indicated on the component
identification labels, and make sure they are compatible with those of the
component to be replaced.

Aft e r r e pla cing a com pone n t :


1. Place it in its antistatic protection packaging and close it.
2. Attach a report to the packaging explaining the reason for the replacement,
and identify the network site, physical location, shelf, and time of
replacement.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-23


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Replacing Dslot Modules


This section provides replacement instructions for Dslot modules in the BG-
20B shelf.

CAUTION: Replace the Dslot modules as rapidly as possible.


Because the BG-20B unit must be powered off before
replacing a Dslot module, management, T3/T4
synchronization, and all traffic on the NE are not possible.

To r e pla ce a D slot m odule in t he BG- 2 0 B she lf:


1. Mark each cable connected to the Dslot module for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the Dslot module.
3. Power off the BG-20B unit.
4. Loosen and remove the two screws.
5. Hold the handle on the Dslot module panel and pull the module to be
replaced outward until it is released from the backplane.
6. Continue to hold the handles and gently pull the module out of the shelf.
7. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding
module guides.
8. Push the replacement module in until the front panel of the module is flush
with the front of the BG-20B shelf. If resistance is felt before the
connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
9. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-20B shelf.
10. Power on the BG-20B unit.
11. Reconnect all cables for the Dslot module according to the cable marks.

5-24 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Replacing Eslot Cards


This section provides replacement instructions for Eslot cards in the BG-20E
shelf.

NOTE: All Eslot cards support live insertion. There is no


need to power-off the BG-20B or the BG-20E units when
replacing them.

To r e pla ce a n Eslot ca r d in t he BG- 2 0 E she lf:


1. Mark each cable connected to the Eslot card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the Eslot card.
3. Loosen and remove the two screws.
4. Hold the handles on the Eslot card panel and pull the module to be replaced
outward until it is released from the backplane.
5. Continue to hold the handles and gently pull the module out of the shelf.
6. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding
module guides.
7. Push the replacement module in until the front panel of the module is flush
with the front of the BG-20E shelf. If resistance is felt before the
connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-20E shelf.
9. Reconnect all cables for the Eslot card according to the cable marks.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-25


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Replacing Traffic Modules on the SM_ 1 0 E


This section provides replacement instructions for traffic modules on the
SM_10E card.

NOTE: All traffic modules on the SM_10E support live


insertion. There is no need to extract the SM_10E card when
replacing it.

To r e pla ce a t r a ffic m odule on t he SM _ 1 0 E:


1. Mark each cable connected to the traffic module on the SM_10E card for
identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the traffic module.
3. Loosen and remove the two screws.
4. Hold the handles on the traffic module panel and pull the module to be
replaced outward until it is released from the SM_10E card.
5. Continue to hold the handle and gently pull the module out of the card.
6. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding
module guides.
7. Push the replacement module in until the front panel of the module is flush
with the front of the SM_10E card. If resistance is felt before the
connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the SM_10E card.
9. Reconnect all cables for the traffic module according to the cable marks.

5-26 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d M a in t e n a n ce
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Replacing I CPs for the SM_ 1 0 E


This section provides replacement instructions for replacing an ICP for an
SM_10E card.

To r e pla ce a n I CP for t he SM _ 1 0 E:
1. Mark each cable connected to the ICP for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect all cables connecting the ICP.
3. Loosen and remove the four screws.
4. Replace the ICP and close the screws to fasten the ICP to the shelf.
5. Reconnect all cables for the ICP according to the cable marks.

Replacing Pow er Modules

CAUTION:
 Each BG-20B/BG-20E shelf has two power modules if
using a DC power supply. Therefore, replacing the power
module does not cause the NE to power off.
 Replace INF_30 modules one at a time so that the system
is not powered off.

To r e pla ce t he pow e r m odule :


1. Cut off the power source connected to the power module by turning off the
corresponding power switch on the RAP.
2. Disconnect the power cable from the replaced power module on the panel.
3. Open the two screws fastening the power module to the shelf.
4. Hold the handle on the panel and pull the module to be replaced outward
until it is released from the backplane.
5. Continue to hold the handles and gently pull the module out of the shelf.
6. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding
module guides.
7. Push the replacement module in until the front panel of the module is flush
with the front of the BG-20B or BG-20E shelf. If resistance is felt before
the connectors are flush, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 5-27


M a in t e n a n ce BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

8. Close the screws on the panel to fasten the module to the BG-20B or
BG-20E shelf.
9. Reconnect the power cable to the replacement power module.
10. Turn on the power switch on the RAP.

Replacing SFP Transceivers


ECI Telecom supplies field-replaceable SFP transceivers in all optical
interfaces and electrical STM-1 interfaces. Hot swapping is allowed, provided
you observe all the safety precautions described in Before You Start (on page
2-1) during the replacement.

To r e pla ce a n SFP t r a nsce ive r :


1. Mark each fiber or cable connected to the transceiver for identification
purposes.
2. Identify the position of the SFP transceiver to be replaced.
3. Disconnect the fibers or cables connected to the transceiver.
4. Remove the transceiver plug-in by pulling its tab.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement transceiver plug-in into the prescribed
position, and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the
corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver
clicks into place (see the following figure). If you feel resistance before the
transceiver plug-in is fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the
insertion.

Figure 5-1: Inserting an SFP transceiver into an XIO30 module

6. Reconnect the fibers or cables disconnected in Step 3.

5-28 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


A
Con n e ct ion D a t a

I n this appendix:
Overview ........................................................................................................ A-2
INF_20B/INF_20E DC Input Power Connectors ........................................... A-3
AC_CONV_20B/AC_CONV_20E AC Input Power Connectors ................. A-3
MNG Ethernet Connector ............................................................................... A-4
T3/T4 Timing Connector ................................................................................ A-5
RS-232 Connector .......................................................................................... A-6
Orderwire Connector ...................................................................................... A-7
V.11 Overhead Connector ............................................................................. A-8
Alarms Connector ........................................................................................... A-9
E1 Connectors on MXC20 .......................................................................... A-11
E1 Connectors on ME1_21 and ME1_42 .................................................... A-15
Ethernet Interface Connectors ..................................................................... A-21
M345_3 Card Connection Data ................................................................... A-21
P345_3E Card Connection Data ................................................................... A-21
PE1_63 Card Connection Data .................................................................... A-21
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection Data....................................................... A-22
SM_10E Card Connection Data ................................................................... A-22
ICP_VF Connection Data ............................................................................ A-32
ICP_V24 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-33
ICP_V35 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-36

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 1


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Ove r vie w
This appendix provides connection data for the user connectors located in the
BG-20B and BG-20E shelves and associated ancillary equipment supplied by
ECI Telecom.

Table A-1: Connectors reference

Description
INF_20B/INF_20E DC Input Power Connectors (on page A-3)
AC_CONV_20B/AC_CONV_20E AC Input Power Connectors (on page A-3)
MNG Ethernet Connector (on page A-4)
T3/T4 Timing Connector
Orderwire Connector (on page A-7)
RS-232 Connector
V.11 Overhead Connector (on page A-8)
Alarms Connector (on page A-9)
E1 Connectors on MXC20 (on page A-11)
E1 Connectors on ME1_21 and ME1_42 (on page A-15)
Ethernet Interface Connectors (on page A-21)
M345_3 Card Connection Data (on page A-21)
P345_3E Card Connection Data
PE1_63 Card Connection Data (on page A-21)
ESW_2G_8F_E Card Connection Data (on page A-22)
SM_10E Card Connection Data
ICP_VF Connection Data (on page A-32)
ICP_V24 Connection Data
ICP_V35 Connection Data

Any connectors not described in this appendix are reserved for use by ECI
Telecom technical support personnel and/or for future expansion, and therefore
no user equipment may be connected to them.

A- 2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I N F_ 2 0 B/ I N F_ 2 0 E D C I nput
Pow e r Con n e ct or s
The DC input power connectors, designated POWER IN A and POWER IN B,
are 3-pin D-type male connectors located on the INF_20B/INF_20E panel. The
following figure identifies the functions of the POWER IN connector pins, as
seen when looking into the connector.

Figure A-1: DC input power connectors, pin functions

AC_ CON V_ 2 0 B/ AC_ CON V_ 2 0 E


AC I n pu t Pow e r Conn e ct or s
AC input power connectors are located on the
AC_CONV_20B/AC_CONV_20E front panel, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure A-2: AC input power connectors

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 3


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

M N G Et he r ne t Conne ct or
The Ethernet connector located on the BG-20B panel, designated MNG, is an
eight-pin RJ-45 connector that provides an Ethernet 10BaseT management
interface.
The Ethernet connector is wired as a station port intended for direct connection
through a straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT Ethernet hub.
The following figure identifies the connector pins, as seen when looking into
the connector. The following table lists the pin assignment for a typical
connector.

Figure A-3: Ethernet connectors, pin identification

Table A-2: Ethernet connector, pin assignment

Pin Designation Function Direction


1 TX+ Transmit, + wire Output
2 TX- Transmit, - wire Output
3 RX+ Receive, + wire Output
4,5 N/C Not connected Output
6 RX- Receive, - wire Output
7 NC Not connected Output
8 N/C Not connected Output

A- 4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

T3 / T4 Tim in g Con n e ct or
The T3/T4 timing connector is an RJ-45 connector that is located on the
MCP30 panel and designated as T3/T4. The interface includes a group of lines
that are usually connected to the site timing reference distribution subsystem:
 Clock input (T3 2.048 Mbps or 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703
interface)
 Clock output (T4 2.048 Mbps or 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703
interface)
The following figure identifies the connector pins, as seen when looking into
the connector. The following table lists the pin assignment for the connector. It
also lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables
offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.

Figure A-4: T3/T4 connector, pin identification

Table A-3: T3/T4 connector, pin identification

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 CLK2MHZ_IN(A) 2 MHz clock input Input Blue
2 CLK2MHZ_IN(B) Input White/Blue
3 CLK2MHZ_OUT(A) 2 MHz clock output Output Green
4 CLK2MHZ_OUT(B) Output White/Green
5 CLK2MBIT_IN(A) 2 Mbps clock input Input Brown
6 CLK2MBIT_IN(B) Input White/Brown
7 CLK2MBIT_OUT(A) 2 Mbps clock Output Orange
output
8 CLK2MBIT_OUT(B) Output White/Orange

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 5


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

RS- 2 3 2 Con n e ct or
There is one RS-232 connector that provides a Debug RS-232 interface. The
RS-232 interface is an RJ-45 connector that is located on the ICP_MCP30
panel and is designated as RS-232.
The following figure shows an RS-232 cable from the RJ-45 connector to the
DB-9 female connector. The following table lists the connector pin assignment
for both the RJ-45 connector and the DB-9 connector, when using the RS-232
cable supplied by ECI Telecom.

Figure A-5: RS-232 overhead connectors, pin identification

Figure A-6: RS-232 overhead cable

A- 6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Figure A-7: RS-232 overhead cable label

Table A-4: RS-232 connectors, pin assignment

Pin in RJ-45 Name Function Direction Pin in DB-9


1 COM-TX Channel transmit Output 2
2 GND Ground --- 5
3, 4, 5, 6 --- Not connected --- ---
7 COM-RX Channel receive Input 3
8 GND Ground --- ---

Or de r w ir e Conne ct or
The OW connector is an RJ-45 connector that is located on the BG-20B panel
and designated as OW. The interface includes a pair of E1 balanced interfaces
that is connected to an RJ-45 connector on the BG-OW front panel.
The following figure identifies the connector pins, as seen when looking into
the connector. The following table lists the pin assignment for the orderwire
connector at both the BG-20B and BG-OW ends, when using the OW cable
supplied by ECI Telecom.

Figure A-8: OW connector, pin identification

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 7


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table A-5: OW connector, pin assignment

Pin (in BG-20B Name Function Direction Pin (in BG-OW)


1 OW_IN(A) Orderwire input Input 1
2 OW_IN(B) Input 2
3 OW_OUT(A) Orderwire output Output 3
4 OW_OUT(B) Output 4
5 --- --- --- 5
6 --- --- --- 6
7 --- --- --- 7
8 --- --- --- 8

V.1 1 Ove r h e a d Con n e ct or


The V.11 overhead connector is a 15-pin D-type female connector on the BG-
20B panel that provides a V.11 overhead interface.
The following figure identifies the connector pins, as seen when looking into
the connector. The following table lists the connector pin assignment.

Figure A-9: V.11 connector, pin identification

Table A-6: V.11 overhead connector, pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 V11_RCLK(-) Receive timing A To DTE Brown
2 V11_TCLK(-) Transmit timing A To DTE Red
3 V11_RXD(-) Receive data A To DTE Orange
4 V11_TTCLK(-) Terminal timing A From DTE Yellow
5 V11_TXD(-) Transmit data A From DTE Green
6 V11_RCLK(+) Receive timing B To DTE Brown/Gray ring
7 V11_TCLK(+) Transmit timing B To DTE Red/Gray ring

A- 8 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


8 V11_RXD(+) Receive data B To DTE Orange/Gray ring
9 V11_TTCLK(+) Terminal timing B From DTE Yellow/Gray ring
10 V11_TXD(+) Transmit data B From DTE Green/Gray ring
11 --- Not connected --- ---
12 --- Not connected --- ---
13 --- Not connected --- ---
14 GND Ground --- Blue
15 CGND Chassis ground --- Drain wire (braided)

Ala r m s Con n e ct or
The Alarms connector, designated ALARMS, is a 15-pin D-type male
connector on the BG-20B panel that provides an alarm interface connecting to
the RAP. The connector supports two groups of lines:
 Four external alarm input lines. The alarm input lines are monitored by the
BG-20 management subsystem. Each input is connected to the input diode
of an optcoupler.
 Three alarm output lines. Each output is provided by a relay dry contact.
Relay contact ratings are 75 V in open state and 1 A in closed state.
The ALARMS connector can be connected in one of the following
configurations:
 Direct connection to a customer’s alarms collection facilities
 Connection to the RAP
ECI Telecom offers appropriate cables for each of these configurations.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 9


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

The following figure identifies the connector pins, as seen when looking into
the connector. The following table lists the connector pin assignment.

Figure A-10: Alarms connector, pin identification

Table A-7: Alarms connector, pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 ALARM_IN1(A) First alarm input Input Brown
6 ALARM_IN1(B) Input Brown/Gray ring
2 ALARM_IN2(A) Second alarm input Input Red
7 ALARM_IN2(B) Input Red/Gray ring
3 ALARM_IN3(A) Third alarm input Input Orange
8 ALARM_IN3(A) Input Orange/Gray ring
4 ALARM_IN4(A) Fourth alarm input Input Yellow
9 ALARM_IN4(B) Input Yellow/Gray ring
11 ALARM_OUT1(A) First alarm output Output Blue
12 ALARM_OUT1(B) Output Blue/Gray ring
13 ALARM_OUT2(A) Second alarm output Output Violet
14 ALARM_OUT2(B) Output Violet/Gray ring
5 ALARM_OUT3(A) Third alarm output, Output Green
common
10 ALARM_OUT3(B1) Third alarm output, Output Green/Gray ring
normally closed
15 ALARM_OUT3(B2) Third alarm output, Output White
normally open

A- 1 0 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

E1 Conn e ct or s on M XC2 0
The MXC20 provides 21 balanced E1 tributary interfaces and has two 50-pin
SCSI female connectors. The upper connector, designated as E1 (12-21), serves
the 10 × E1 receive and transmit signals and the lower connector, designated as
E1 (1-11), serves the 11 × E1 receive and transmit signals. The same cable is
used for both the upper and lower connectors.
The following figure identifies the connector pins, as seen when looking into
the connector. The following tables list the pin assignment for a typical
connector. They also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding
pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary
connector and a distribution frame.

Figure A-11: E1 connectors for MXC20, pin identification

Table A-8: 1-11 E1 connector (lower), pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 TTIP1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Output Blue/White ring
2 TRING1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Output White/Blue ring
3 TTIP2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Output Orange/White
ring
4 TRING2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Output White/Orange
ring
5 TTIP3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Output White/Green ring
6 TRING3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Output Green/White ring
7 --- Not connected --- ---
8 --- Not connected --- ---
9 --- Not connected --- ---
10 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output Brown/White ring

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 1 1


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


11 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Output White/Brown ring
12 TTIP5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Output Light Blue/White
ring
13 TRING5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Output White/Light Blue
ring
14 TTIP6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Output Blue/Red ring
15 TRING6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Output Red/Blue ring
16 TTIP7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Output Orange/Red ring
17 TRING7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Output Red/Orange ring
18 TTIP8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output Green/Red ring
19 TRING8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Output Red/Green ring
20 TTIP9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Output Brown/Red ring
21 TRING9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Output Red/Brown ring
22 TTIP10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Output Light Blue/Red
ring
23 TRING10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Output Red/Light Blue
ring
24 TTIP11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Output Blue/Black ring
25 TRING11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Output Black/Blue ring
26 RTIP1 Receive, tributary 1, wire A Input Orange/Black
ring
27 RRING1 Receive, tributary 1, wire B Input Black/Orange
ring
28 RTIP2 Receive, tributary 2, wire A Input Green/Black ring
29 RRING2 Receive, tributary 2, wire B Input Black/Green ring
30 RTIP3 Receive, tributary 3, wire A Input Brown/Black ring
31 RRING3 Receive, tributary 3, wire B Input Black/Brown ring
32 --- Not connected --- ---
33 --- Not connected --- ---
34 --- Not connected --- ---
35 RTIP4 Receive, tributary 4, wire A Input Light Blue/Black
ring
36 RRING4 Receive, tributary 4, wire B Input Black/Light Blue
ring
37 RTIP5 Receive, tributary 5, wire A Input Blue/Yellow ring
38 RRING5 Receive, tributary 5, wire B Input Yellow/Blue ring
39 RTIP6 Receive, tributary 6, wire A Input Light
Gray/Brown ring

A- 1 2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


40 RRING6 Receive, tributary 6, wire B Input Pink/Brown ring
41 RTIP7 Receive, tributary 7, wire A Input Brown/Red ring
42 RRING7 Receive, tributary 7, wire B Input Light Gray/Red
ring
43 RTIP8 Receive, tributary 8, wire A Input Yellow/Red ring
44 RRING8 Receive, tributary 8, wire B Input Green/Red ring
45 RTIP9 Receive, tributary 9, wire A Input Blue/Red ring
46 RRING9 Receive, tributary 9, wire B Input Violet/Red ring
47 RTIP10 Receive, tributary 10, wire A Input White/Red ring
48 RRING10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B Input Pink/Red ring
49 RTIP11 Receive, tributary 11, wire A Input Brown/Green ring
50 RRING11 Receive, tributary 11, wire B Input Light Gray/Green
ring

Table A-9: 12-21 E1 connector (upper), pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 TTIP12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire Output Blue/White ring
A
2 TRING12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire Output White/Blue ring
B
3 TTIP13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire Output Orange/White ring
A
4 TRING13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire Output White/Orange ring
B
5 NC Not used --- White/Green ring
6 NC Not used --- Green/White ring
7 --- Not connected --- ---
8 --- Not connected --- ---
9 --- Not connected --- ---
10 TTIP14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire Output Brown/White ring
A
11 TRING14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire Output White/Brown ring
B
12 TTIP15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire Output Light Blue/White
A ring
13 TRING15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire Output White/Light Blue
B ring
14 TTIP16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire Output Blue/Red ring
A

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 1 3


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


15 TRING16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire Output Red/Blue ring
B
16 TTIP17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire Output Orange/Red ring
A
17 TRING17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire Output Red/Orange ring
B
18 TTIP18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire Output Green/Red ring
A
19 TRING18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire Output Red/Green ring
B
20 TTIP19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire Output Brown/Red ring
A
21 TRING19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire Output Red/Brown ring
B
22 TTIP20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire Output Light Blue/Red ring
A
23 TRING20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire Output Red/Light Blue ring
B
24 TTIP21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire Output Blue/Black ring
A
25 TRING21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire Output Black/Blue ring
B
26 RTIP12 Receive, tributary 12, wire A Input Orange/Black ring
27 RRING12 Receive, tributary 12, wire B Input Black/Orange ring
28 RTIP13 Receive, tributary 13, wire A Input Green/Black ring
29 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Black/Green ring
30 NC Not used --- Brown/Black ring
31 NC Not used --- Black/Brown ring
32 --- Not connected --- ---
33 --- Not connected --- ---
34 --- Not connected --- ---
35 RTIP14 Receive, tributary 14, wire A Input Light Blue/Black
ring
36 RRING14 Receive, tributary 14, wire B Input Black/Light Blue
ring
37 RTIP15 Receive, tributary 15, wire A Input Blue/Yellow ring
38 RRING15 Receive, tributary 15, wire B Input Yellow/Blue ring
39 RTIP16 Receive, tributary 16, wire A Input Light Gray/Brown
ring
40 RRING16 Receive, tributary 16, wire B Input Pink/Brown ring

A- 1 4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


41 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Brown/Red ring
42 RRING17 Receive, tributary 17, wire B Input Light Gray/Red ring
43 RTIP18 Receive, tributary 18, wire A Input Yellow/Red ring
44 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Green/Red ring
45 RTIP19 Receive, tributary 19, wire A Input Blue/Red ring
46 RRING19 Receive, tributary 19, wire B Input Violet/Red ring
47 RTIP20 Receive, tributary 20, wire A Input White/Red ring
48 RRING20 Receive, tributary 20, wire B Input Pink/red-ring
49 RTIP21 Receive, tributary 21, wire A Input Brown/Green ring
50 RRING21 Receive, tributary 21, wire B Input Light Gray/Green
ring

E1 Conn e ct or s on M E1 _ 2 1 a nd
M E1 _ 4 2
The ME1_21 provides 21 balanced E1 tributary interfaces and has twin 68-pin
VHDCI female connectors. The ME1_42 provides 42 balanced E1 tributary
interfaces and has two twin 68-pin VHDCI female connectors. Each twin 68-
pin VHDCI connector serves the 21 × E1 receive and transmit signals.
The following figure identifies the connector pins, as seen when looking into
the connector. The following tables list the pin assignment for a typical
connector. They also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding
pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary
connector and a distribution frame.

Figure A-12: E1 connectors for ME1_21 and ME1_42, pin identification

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 1 5


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table A-10: ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P2), pin assignment

P2 Name Function Direction Wire color


pin
1 --- Not connected --- ---
2 TTIP11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Output Brown
3 TRING11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Output Brown/Gray ring
4 --- Not connected --- ---
5 --- Not connected --- ---
6 TTIP10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Output Red
7 TRING10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Output Red/Gray ring
8 TTIP9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Output Orange
9 TRING9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Output Orange/Gray ring
10 --- Not connected --- ---
11 --- Not connected --- ---
12 TRING8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Output Yellow
13 TTIP8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output Yellow/Gray ring
14 TTIP7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Output Green
15 TRING7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Output Green/Gray ring
16 --- Not connected --- ---
17 --- Not connected --- ---
18 TTIP6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Output Blue
19 TRING6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Output Blue/Gray ring
20 TTIP5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Output Violet
21 TRING5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Output Violet/Gray ring
22 --- Not connected --- ---
23 --- Not connected --- ---
24 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output White
25 TRING4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Output White/Gray ring
26 TTIP3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Output Pink
27 TRING3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Output Pink/Gray ring
28 --- Not connected --- ---
29 --- Not connected --- ---
30 TTIP2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Output Brown/White
ring
31 TRING2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Output Red/White ring
32 TTIP1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Output Orange/White
ring

A- 1 6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

P2 Name Function Direction Wire color


pin
33 TRING1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Output Yellow/White
ring
34 --- Not connected --- ---
35 --- Not connected --- ---
36 RTIP11 Receive, tributary 11, wire A Input Green/White ring
37 RRING11 Receive, tributary 11, wire B Input Blue/White ring
38 --- Not connected --- ---
39 --- Not connected --- ---
40 RTIP10 Receive, tributary 10, wire A Input Violet/White ring
41 RRING10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B Input Light
Gray/White ring
42 RTIP9 Receive, tributary 9, wire A Input Red/Brown ring
43 RRING9 Receive, tributary 9, wire B Input Yellow/Brown
ring
44 --- Not connected --- ---
45 --- Not connected --- ---
46 RRING8 Receive, tributary 8, wire B Input Orange/Brown
ring
47 RTIP8 Receive, tributary 8, wire A Input Green/Brown
ring
48 RRING7 Receive, tributary 7, wire B Input Blue/Brown ring
49 RTIP7 Receive, tributary 7, wire A Input Violet/Brown
ring
50 --- Not connected --- ---
51 --- Not connected --- ---
52 RTIP6 Receive, tributary 6, wire A Input Light
Gray/Brown ring
53 RRING6 Receive, tributary 6, wire B Input Pink/Brown ring
54 RTIP5 Receive, tributary 5, wire A Input Brown/Red ring
55 RRING5 Receive, tributary 5, wire B Input Light Gray/Red
ring
56 --- Not connected --- ---
57 --- Not connected --- ---
58 RTIP4 Receive, tributary 4, wire A Input Yellow/Red ring
59 RRING4 Receive, tributary 4, wire B Input Green/Red ring
60 RTIP3 Receive, tributary 3, wire A Input Blue/Red ring
61 RRING3 Receive, tributary 3, wire B Input Violet/Red ring

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 1 7


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

P2 Name Function Direction Wire color


pin
62 --- Not connected --- ---
63 --- Not connected --- ---
64 RTIP2 Receive, tributary 2, wire A Input White/Red ring
65 RRING2 Receive, tributary 2, wire B Input Pink/Red ring
66 RTIP1 Receive, tributary 1, wire A Input Brown/Green
ring
67 RRING1 Receive, tributary 1, wire B Input Light
Gray/Green ring
68 --- Not connected --- ---
Shelf --- BRAID --- ---

Table A-11: ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P1), pin assignment

P1 Name Function Direction Wire color


pin
1 --- Not connected --- ---
2 RRING12 Receive, tributary 12, wire B Input Brown/Yellow
ring
3 RTIP12 Receive, tributary 12, wire A Input Red/Yellow ring
4 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Orange/Yellow
ring
5 RTIP13 Receive, tributary 13, wire A Input Green/Yellow
ring
6 --- Not connected Input ---
7 --- Not connected --- ---
8 RRING14 Receive, tributary 14, wire B --- Blue/Yellow ring
9 RTIP14 Receive, tributary 14, wire A Input Violet/Yellow
ring
10 RTIP15 Receive, tributary 15, wire A Input Light
Gray/Yellow
ring
11 RRING15 Receive, tributary 15, wire B Input White/Yellow
ring
12 --- Not connected --- ---
13 --- Not connected --- ---
14 RRING16 Receive, tributary 16, wire B Input Brown/Blue ring
15 RTIP16 Receive, tributary 16, wire A Input Red/Blue ring
16 RRING17 Receive, tributary 17, wire B Input Orange/Blue ring
17 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Yellow/Blue ring

A- 1 8 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

P1 Name Function Direction Wire color


pin
18 --- Not connected --- ---
19 --- Not connected --- ---
20 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Green/Blue ring
21 RTIP18 Receive, tributary 18, wire A Input Violet/Blue ring
22 RRING19 Receive, tributary 19, wire B Input Light Gray/Blue
ring
23 RTIP19 Receive, tributary 19, wire A Input White/Blue ring
24 --- Not connected --- ---
25 --- Not connected --- ---
26 RRING20 Receive, tributary 20, wire B Input Brown/Orange
ring
27 RTIP20 Receive, tributary 20, wire A Input Red/Orange ring
28 RRING21 Receive, tributary 21, wire B Input Yellow/Orange
ring
29 RTIP21 Receive, tributary 21, wire A Input Green/Orange
ring
30 --- Not connected --- ---
31 --- Not connected --- ---
32 --- Not connected --- ---
33 --- Not connected --- ---
34 --- Not connected --- ---
35 --- Not connected --- ---
36 TRING12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Output Blue/Orange ring
37 TTIP12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Violet/Orange
ring
38 TRING13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Output Light
Gray/Orange
ring
39 TTIP13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Output White/Orange
ring
40 --- Not connected --- ---
41 --- Not connected --- ---
42 TRING14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Output Brown/Violet
ring
43 TTIP14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Output Red/Violet ring
44 TRING15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Output Orange/Violet
ring

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 1 9


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

P1 Name Function Direction Wire color


pin
45 TTIP15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Output Yellow/Violet
ring
46 --- Not connected --- ---
47 --- Not connected --- ---
48 TTIP16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Green/Violet
ring
49 TRING16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire B Output Blue/Violet ring
50 TRING17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Output Light
Gray/Violet ring
51 TTIP17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Output White/Violet
ring
52 --- Not connected --- ---
53 --- Not connected --- ---
54 TRING18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Output Brown/Pink ring
55 TTIP18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Output Red/Pink ring
56 TRING19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Output Orange/Pink ring
57 TTIP19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Output Yellow/Pink ring
58 --- Not connected --- ---
59 --- Not connected --- ---
60 TRING20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire B Output Green/Pink ring
61 TTIP20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Output Blue/Pink ring
62 TRING21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire B Output Light Gray/Pink
ring
63 TTIP21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Output White/Pink ring
64 --- Not connected --- ---
65 --- Not connected --- ---
66 --- Not connected --- ---
67 --- Not connected --- ---
68 --- Not connected --- ---
Shelf --- BRAID --- ---

A- 2 0 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Et he r ne t I nt e r fa ce Conne ct or s
The BG-20B provides six 10/100BaseT interfaces directly from its front panel.
The connectors for the six Ethernet channels are six RJ-45 connectors, each
supporting a 10/100BaseT interface.
The MEoP_4 provides four 10/100BaseT interfaces directly from its front
panel. The connectors for the four Ethernet channels are four RJ-45 connectors,
each supporting a 10/100BaseT interface.
All 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces in the BG-20B base card and
MEoP_4 support Auto MDIX. The figure "Ethernet connectors, pin
identification" in MNG Ethernet Connector (on page A-4) identifies the RJ-45
connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector. The table Ethernet
connector, pin assignment in MNG Ethernet Connector (on page A-4) lists the
pin assignment for a typical connector.

M 3 4 5 _ 3 Ca r d Con n e ct ion D a t a
The M345_3 card provides three unbalanced E3/DS-3 tributary interfaces. The
E3/DS-3 connectors are coaxial connectors (6 x DIN 1.0/2.3) in the M345_3
front panel.

P3 4 5 _ 3 E Ca r d Con n e ct ion D a t a
The P345_3E card provides three unbalanced E3/DS-3 tributary interfaces. The
E3/DS-3 connectors are coaxial connectors (6 x DIN 1.0/2.3) on the P345_3E
front panel.

PE1 _ 6 3 Ca r d Con n e ct ion D a t a


The PE1_63 provides 63 balanced E1 tributary interfaces and has three twin
68-pin VHDCI female connectors. Each twin 68-pin VHDCI connector serves
the 21 × E1 receive and transmit signals.
The PE1_63 uses the same cable as that for the ME1_21/ME1_42. The figure
"E1 connectors for ME1_21 and ME1_42, pin identification" identifies the E1
connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector. The Table
"ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P2), pin assignment" and the table
"ME1_21/ME1_42 E1 connector (P1), pin assignment" list the pin assignment
for this connector (E1 Connectors on ME1_21 and ME1_42 (on page A-15)).

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 2 1


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

ESW _ 2 G_ 8 F_ E Ca r d Con n e ct ion


Data
In addition to two GbE interfaces based on SFP modules, the ESW_2G_8F_E
card provides eight 10/100BaseT interfaces directly from its front panel. The
connectors for the eight Ethernet channels are eight RJ-45 connectors, each
supporting a 10/100BaseT interface.
All 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces in the ESW_2G_8F_E support Auto
MDIX. The figure "Ethernet connectors, pin identification" identifies the RJ-45
connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector. The table "Ethernet
connectors, pin assignment" lists the pin asssignment for a typical connector
(MNG Ethernet Connector (on page A-4)).

SM _ 1 0 E Ca r d Con n e ct ion D a t a
The SM_10E base card does not have any external interfaces. All external
interfaces are from the front panel of each type of SM_10E traffic module. The
following types of SM_10E traffic module are supported in V3:
 SM_FXO_8E
 SM_FXS_8E
 SM_EM_24W_6E
 SM_V24E
 SM_V35E
 SM_CODIR_4E
All types of SM_10E traffic module use the same connector for the cabling of
their external traffic interfaces. This connector is a single SCSI-36 female
connector located on the front panel. The following figure identifies the
connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.

Figure A-13: SM_10E traffic module connector, pin identification

A- 2 2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

The following sections contain tables that describe the pin assignment of the
connector for each type of traffic module. These tables include the color of the
wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom
for connecting between the SM_10E traffic module connector and a
distribution frame.

Connection Data for SM_ FXO_ 8 E and


SM_ FXS_ 8 E I nterfaces
The SM_FXO_8E and the SM_FXS_8E each support eight channels. Each
channel has one pair of wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a
typical connector. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the
corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting
between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.

Table A-12: SM_10E SM_FXO_8 and SM_FXS_8 connector, pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 A1 Channel 1, wire A Bidirectional Brown
2 B1 Channel 1, wire B Bidirectional Brown/Black
3 A2 Channel 2, wire A Bidirectional Red
4 B2 Channel 2, wire B Bidirectional Red/Black
5 A3 Channel 3, wire A Bidirectional Orange
6 B3 Channel 3, wire B Bidirectional Orange/Black
7 A4 Channel 4, wire A Bidirectional Yellow
8 B4 Channel 4, wire B Bidirectional Yellow/Black
9 A5 Channel 5, wire A Bidirectional Green
10 B5 Channel 5, wire B Bidirectional Green/Black
11 A6 Channel 6, wire A Bidirectional Blue
12 B6 Channel 6, wire B Bidirectional Blue/Black
13 A7 Channel 7, wire A Bidirectional Violet
14 B7 Channel 7, wire B Bidirectional Violet/Black
15 A8 Channel 8, wire A Bidirectional White
16 B8 Channel 8, wire B Bidirectional White/Black

NOTE: Only eight of 18 pairs of wires are used for the


SM_FXO_8E or SM_FXS_8E interfaces.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 2 3


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Connection Data for SM_ EM_ 2 4 W 6 E


I nterfaces
The SM_EM_24W6E supports six channels. Each channel has one pair of
wires in 2W mode, two pairs of wires in 4W or 2W E&M mode, and three pairs
of wires in 4W E&M mode. The following table lists the pin assignment for a
typical connector. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the
corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting
between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.

Table A-13: SM_10E SM_EM_24W6E connector, pin assignment

Pin Name Mode Function Direction Wire color


1 RA1 4W Channel 1, Rx, wire A Output Brown
2W Channel 1, wire A Bidirectional
2 RB1 4W Channel 1, Rx, wire B Output Brown/Black
2W Channel 1, wire B Bidirectional
3 RA2 4W Channel 2, Rx, wire A Output Red
2W Channel 2, wire A Bidirectional
4 RB2 4W Channel 2, Rx, wire B Output Red/Black
2W Channel 2, wire B Bidirectional
5 RA3 4W Channel 3, Rx, wire A Output Orange
2W Channel 3, wire A Bidirectional
6 RB3 4W Channel 3, Rx, wire B Output Orange/Black
2W Channel 3, wire B Bidirectional
7 RA4 4W Channel 4, Rx, wire A Output Yellow
2W Channel 4, wire A Bidirectional
8 RB4 4W Channel 4, Rx, wire B Output Yellow/Black
2W Channel 4, wire B Bidirectional
9 RA5 4W Channel 5, Rx, wire A Output Green
2W Channel 5, wire A Bidirectional
10 RB5 4W Channel 5, Rx, wire B Output Green/Black
2W Channel 5, wire B Bidirectional
11 RA6 4W Channel 6, Rx, wire A Output Blue
2W Channel 6, wire A Bidirectional
12 RB6 4W Channel 6, Rx, wire B Output Blue/Black
2W Channel 6, wire B Bidirectional

A- 2 4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pin Name Mode Function Direction Wire color


13 E1 Any Channel 1, E Output Violet
14 M1 Any Channel 1, M Input Violet/Black
15 E2 Any Channel 2, E Output White
16 M2 Any Channel 2, M Input White/Black
17 E3 Any Channel 3, E Output Pink
18 M3 Any Channel 3, M Input Pink/Black
19 TA1 4W Channel 1, Tx, wire A Input Brown/White
2W --- ---
20 TB1 4W Channel 1, Tx, wire B Input Red/White
2W --- ---
21 TA2 4W Channel 2, Tx, wire A Input Orange/White
2W --- ---
22 TB2 4W Channel 2, Tx, wire B Input Yellow/White
2W --- ---
23 TA3 4W Channel 3, Tx, wire A Input Green/White
2W --- ---
24 TB3 4W Channel 3, Tx, wire B Input Blue/White
2W --- ---
25 TA4 4W Channel 4, Tx, wire A Input Violet/White
2W --- ---
26 TB4 4W Channel 4, Tx, wire B Input Light Gray/White
2W --- ---
27 TA5 4W Channel 5, Tx, wire A Input Red/Brown
2W --- ---
28 TB5 4W Channel 5, Tx, wire B Yellow/Brown
29 TA6 4W Channel 6, Tx, wire A Orange/Brown
30 TB6 4W Channel 6, Tx, wire B Green/Brown
31 E4 Any Channel 4, E Output Blue/Brown
32 M4 Any Channel 4, M Input Violet/Brown
33 E5 Any Channel 5, E Output Light
Gray/Brown
34 M5 Any Channel 5, M Input Pink/Brown
35 E6 Any Channel 6, E Output Brown/Red
36 M6 Any Channel 6, M Input Light Gray/Red

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 2 5


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

NOTE: The number of wires used depends on the mode of


each channel. All 18 pairs of wires are used for the
SM_EM_24W6E module if all channels are in four-wire
E&M mode.

Connection Data for SM_ V3 5 E I nterfaces


The SM_V35E supports two channels of V.35 interface. Each channel has 16
wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a typical connector. This
table also lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the
cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector
and a distribution frame.

Table A-14: SM_10E SM_V35E connector, pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 CH1# RD- (104b) Ch1# receive data - Output Brown
2 CH1# RD+ (104a) Ch1# receive data + Output Brown/Black
3 CH1# RC- (115b) Ch1# receive timing - Output Red
4 CH1# RC+ (115a) Ch1# receive timing + Output Red/Black
5 CH1# TMC- (113b) Ch1# terminal timing - Input Orange
6 CH1# TMC+ (113a) Ch1# terminal timing + Input Orange/Black
7 CH2# RD- (104b) Ch2# receive data - Output Yellow
8 CH2# RD+ (104a) Ch2# receive data + Output Yellow/Black
9 CH2# RC- (115b) Ch2# receive timing - Output Green
10 CH2# RC+ (115a) Ch2# receive timing + Output Green/black
11 CH2# TMC- (113b) Ch2# terminal timing - Input Blue
12 CH2# TMC+ (113a) Ch2# terminal timing + Input Blue/Black
13 CH2# CTS (106) Ch2# clear to send Output Violet
14 CH2# DSR (107) Ch2# data set ready Output Violet/Black
15 CH1# DCD(109) Ch1# data carrier detect Output White
16 CH2# DCD(109) Ch2# data carrier detect Output White/Black
17 GND Signal ground --- Pink
18 GND Signal ground --- Pink/Black
19 CH1# TD- (103b) Ch1# transmit data - Input Brown/White
20 CH1# TD+ (103a) Ch1# transmit data + Input Red/White
21 CH1# TC- (114b) Ch1# transmit timing - Output Orange/White
22 CH1# TC+ (114a) Ch1# transmit timing + Output Yellow/White
23 CH1# CTS (106) Ch1# clear to send Output Green/White

A- 2 6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


24 CH1# DSR (107) Ch1# data set ready Output Blue/White
25 CH2# TD- (103b) Ch2# transmit data - Input Violet/White
26 CH2# TD+ (103a) Ch2# transmit data + Input Light
Gray/White
27 CH2# TC- (114b) Ch2# transmit timing - Output Red/Brown
28 CH2# TC+ (114a) Ch2# transmit timing + Output Yellow/Brown
29 CH1# RTS (105) Ch1# request to send Input Orange/Brown
30 --- --- --- ---
31 CH2# RTS (105) Ch2# request to send Input Blue/Brown
32 --- --- --- ---
33 CH1# DTR (108) Ch1# data terminal ready Input Light
Gray/Brown
34 --- Not connected --- ---
35 CH2# DTR (108) Ch2# data terminal ready Input Brown/Red
36 --- Not connected --- ---

Connection Data for SM_ V2 4 E I nterfaces


The SM_V24E module supports the following three modes:
 8 x V.24 transparent without control signals
 4 x V.24 asynchronous mode with control signals
 2 x V.24 synchronous mode with control signals
In 8 x V.24 transparent mode, the SM_V24E supports eight channels. Each
channel has three wires. The following table lists the pin assignment for a
typical connector when the SM_V24E is in 8 x V.24 transparent mode. This
table also lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the
cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector
and a distribution frame.

Table A-15: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 8 x V.24 transparent
without controls mode

Pin Name Function Direction Wire Color


13 CH7# SD(103) Ch7# transmit data Input Violet
14 CH7# RD(104) Ch7# receive data Output Violet/Black
15 CH8# SD(103) Ch8# transmit data Input White
16 CH8# RD(104) Ch8# receive data Output White/Black
17 GND Signal ground --- Pink

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 2 7


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pin Name Function Direction Wire Color


18 GND Signal ground --- Pink/Black
19 CH1# SD(103) Ch1# transmit data Input Brown/White
20 CH1# RD(104) Ch1# receive data Output Red/White
21 CH2# SD(103) Ch2# transmit data Input Orange/White
22 CH2# RD(104) Ch2# receive data Output Yellow/White
23 CH3# SD(103) Ch3# transmit data Input Green/White
24 CH3# RD(104) Ch3# receive data Output Blue/White
25 CH4# SD(103) Ch4# transmit data Input Violet/White
26 CH4# RD(104) Ch4# receive data Output Light Gray/White
27 CH5# SD(103) Ch5# transmit data Input Red/Brown
28 CH5# RD(104) Ch5# receive data Output Yellow/Brown
29 CH6# SD(103) Ch6# transmit data Input Orange/Brown
30 CH6# RD(104) Ch6# receive data Output Green/Brown
31 GND Signal ground --- Blue/Brown
32 GND Signal ground --- Violet/Brown
33 GND Signal ground --- Light Gray/Brown
34 GND Signal ground --- Pink/Brown
35 GND Signal ground --- Brown/Red
36 GND Signal ground --- Light Gray/Red

In 4 x V.24 asynchronous with controls mode, the SM_V24E supports four


channels. Each channel has eight wires. The following table lists the pin
assignment for a typical connector when the SM_V24E is in 4 x V.24
asynchronous with controls mode. This table also lists the color of the wire
connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for
connecting between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.

Table A-16: SM_V24E connector, pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire Color


1 CH1# RTS(105) Ch1# require to send Input Brown
2 CH1# CTS(106) Ch1# clear to send Output Brown/Black
3 CH1# DTR(108) Ch1# data terminal Input Red
ready
4 CH1# DSR(107) Ch1# data set ready Output Red/Black
5 CH1# DCD(109) Ch1# data carrier detect Output Orange
6 CH3# DCD(109) Ch3# data carrier detect Output Orange/Black
7 CH2# RTS(105) Ch2# require to send Input Yellow
8 CH2# CTS(106) Ch2# clear to send Output Yellow/Black

A- 2 8 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Pin Name Function Direction Wire Color


9 CH2# DTR(108) Ch2# data terminal Input Green
ready
10 CH2# DSR(107) Ch2# data set ready Output Green/Black
11 CH2# DCD(109) Ch2# data carrier detect Output Blue
12 CH4# DCD(109) Ch4# data carrier detect Output Blue/Black
13 CH4# RTS(105) Ch4# require to send Input Violet
14 CH4# CTS(106) Ch4# clear to send Output Violet/Black
15 CH4# DTR(108) Ch4# data terminal Input White
ready
16 CH4# DSR(107) Ch4# data set ready Output White/Black
17 --- Not connected --- ---
18 --- Not connected --- ---
19 CH1# SD(103) Ch1# transmit data Input Brown/White
20 CH1# RD(104) Ch1# receive data Output Red/White
21 CH2# SD(103) Ch2# transmit data Input Orange/White
22 CH2# RD(104) Ch2# receive data Output Yellow/White
23 CH3# SD(103) Ch3# transmit data Input Green/White
24 CH3# RD(104) Ch3# receive data Output Blue/White
25 CH4# SD(103) Ch4# transmit data Input Violet/White
26 CH4# RD(104) Ch4# receive data Output Light Gray/White
27 CH3# RTS(105) Ch3# require to send Input Red/Brown
28 CH3# CTS(106) Ch3# clear to send Output Yellow/Brown
29 CH3# DTR(108) Ch3# data terminal read Input Orange/Brown
30 CH3# DSR(107) Ch3# data set ready Output Green/Brown
31 --- Not connected --- ---
32 --- Not connected --- ---
33 SG1 Signal ground --- Light Gray/Brown
34 SG2 Signal ground --- Pink/Brown
35 SG3 Signal ground --- Brown/Red
36 SG4 Signal ground --- Light Gray/Red

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 2 9


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

In 2 x V.24 synchronous with controls mode, the SM_V24E supports two


channels. Each channel has eleven wires. The following table lists the pin
assignment for a typical connector when the SM_V24E is in 2 x V.24
synchronous with controls mode. This table also lists the color of the wire
connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for
connecting between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.

Table A-17: SM_10E SM_V24E connector, pin assignment for 2 x V.24


synchronous with controls mode

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 CH1# RTS(105) Ch1# require to send Input Brown
2 CH1# CTS(106) Ch1# clear to send Output Brown/Black
3 CH1# DTR(108) Ch1# data terminal Input Red
ready
4 CH1# DSR(107) Ch1# data set ready Output Red/Black
5 CH1# DCD(109) Ch1# data carrier Output Orange
detect
6 CH1# RC(115) Ch1# receive timing Output Orange/Black
7 CH2# RTS(105) Ch2# require to send Input Yellow
8 CH2# CTS(106) Ch2# clear to send Output Yellow/Black
9 CH2# DTR(108) Ch2# data terminal Input Green
ready
10 CH2# DSR(107) Ch2# data set ready Output Green/Black
11 CH2# DCD(109) Ch2# data carrier Output Blue
detect
12 CH2# RC(115) Ch2# receive timing Output Blue/Black
13-18 --- Not connected --- ---
19 CH1# SD(103) CH1# transmit data Brown/White
20 CH1# RD(104) CH1# receive data Output Red/White
21 CH2# SD(103) CH2# transmit data Input Orange/White
22 CH2# RD(104) CH2# receive data Output Yellow/White
23 CH1# TMC(113) Ch1# DTE timing Input Green/White
24 CH1# TC(114) Ch1# transmit timing Output Blue/White
25 CH2# TMC(113) Ch2# DTE timing Input Violet/White
26 CH2# TC(114) Ch2# transmit timing Output Light Gray/White
27-34 --- Not connected --- ---
35 SG1 Signal ground --- Brown/Red
36 SG2 Signal ground --- Light Gray/Red

A- 3 0 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Connection Data for SM_ CODI R_ 4 E


I nterfaces
The SM_CODIR_4E supports four channels of codirectional 64 Kbps interface.
Each channel has two pairs of wires. The following table lists the pin
assignment for a typical connector. This table also lists the color of the wire
connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for
connecting between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.

Table A-18: SM_10E SM_CODIR_4E connector, pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 RA1 Channel 1, Rx, wire A Input Brown
2 RB1 Channel 1, Rx, wire B Input Brown/Black
3 RA2 Channel 2, Rx, wire A Input Red
4 RB2 Channel 2, Rx, wire B Input Red/Black
5 RA3 Channel 3, Rx, wire A Input Orange
6 RB3 Channel 3, Rx, wire B Input Orange/Black
7 RA4 Channel 4, Rx, wire A Input Yellow
8 RB4 Channel 4, Rx, wire B Input Yellow/Black
9-18 --- Not connected --- ---
19 TA1 Channel 1, Tx, wire A Output Brown/White
20 TB1 Channel 1, Tx, wire B Output Red/White
21 TA2 Channel 2, Tx, wire A Output Orange/White
22 TB2 Channel 2, Tx, wire B Output Yellow/White
23 TA3 Channel 3, Tx, wire A Output Green/White
24 TB3 Channel 3, Tx, wire B Output Blue/White
25 TA4 Channel 4, Tx, wire A Output Violet/White
26 TB4 Channel 4, Tx, wire B Output Light Gray/White
27- --- Not connected --- ---
36

NOTE: Only eight of 18 pairs of wires are used for


SM_CODIR_4E interfaces.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 3 1


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I CP_ VF Conn e ct ion D a t a


A single ICP_VF can serve one of the following SM_10E modules:
 SM_FXS_8E
 SM_FXO_8E
 SM_EM_24W6E (Connectors marked with CH7 and CH8 are not
connected.)
 SM_Codir_4_E (Connectors marked with CH5 to CH8 are not connected.)
There are eight RJ-45 connectors for external interfaces on the front panel of
the ICP_VF. The figure "Ethernet connectors, pin identification" identifies the
RJ-45 connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector (MNG Ethernet
Connector (on page A-4)). The following tables list the pin assignment for a
typical connector, when serving each type of traffic module. These tables also
list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables
offered by ECI Telecom for connecting between the tributary connector and a
distribution frame.

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 Line A Wire A Bidirectional Blue/White ring
2 Line B Wire B Bidirectional White/Blue ring
4-8 --- Not connected --- ---

Table A-19: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_EM_24W6E

Pin Name Mode Function Direction Wire color


1 RA1 4W Channel 1, Rx, wire A Output Blue/White ring
2W Channel 1, wire A Bidirectional
2 RB1 4W Channel 1, Rx, wire B Output White/blue ring
2W Channel 1, wire B Bidirectional
3 TA1 4W Channel 1, Tx, wire A Input Green/White ring
2W --- ---
4 TB1 4W Channel 1, Tx, wire B Input White/Green ring
2W --- ---
5 --- --- --- --- Brown/White ring
6 --- --- --- --- White/Brown ring
7 E1 Any Channel 1, E Output Orange/White ring
8 M1 Any Channel 1, M Input White/Orange ring

A- 3 2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table A-20: ICP_VF RJ-45 connector, pin assignment for serving SM_CODIR_4E

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 RA Rx, wire A Input Blue/White ring
2 RB Rx, wire B Input White/Blue ring
3 TA Tx, wire A Output Green/White ring
4 TB Tx, wire B Output White/Green ring

I CP_ V2 4 Conn e ct ion D a t a


V.24 interfaces in the SM_V24E are always in DCE mode. One ICP_V24 can
serve one SM_V24E module. The SM_V24E module can work in the
following three modes:
 Eight channels of transparent without controls mode (Connectors marked
with SYNC CH1 and SYNC CH2 are not connected.)
 Four channels of asynchronous with controls mode (Connectors marked
with SYNC CH1 and SYNC CH2 are not connected. Connectors marked
with CH5 to CH8 are not connected.)
 Two channels of synchronous with controls mode (Connectors marked with
CH1 to CH8 are not connected.)
There are two types of connectors for external interfaces on the front panel of
the ICP_V24:
 25-pin D-type male connector for synchronous V.24 interfaces
 9-pin D-type male connector for transparent or asynchronous V.24
interfaces
The following figure identifies the 25-pin D-type male connector pins, as seen
when looking into the connector. The following table lists the connector pin
assignment for a typical connector. This table also lists the color of the wire
connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for
connecting between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.

Figure A-14: 25-pin D-type male connector, pin identification

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 3 3


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table A-21: ICP_V24 synchronous V.24 25-pin D-type connector, pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 --- Not connected --- ---
2 SD (103) Transmit data Input Brown
3 RD (104) Receive data Output Brown/Gray ring
4 RTS (105) Request to send Input Red
5 CTS (106) Clear to send Output Red/Gray ring
6 DSR(107) Data set ready Output Orange
7 GND Signal ground --- Orange/Gray ring
8 DCD(109) Data carrier detect Output Yellow
9 --- Not connected --- ---
10 --- Not connected --- ---
11 --- Not connected --- ---
12 --- Not connected --- ---
13 --- Not connected --- ---
14 --- Not connected --- ---
15 TC (114) Transmit timing --- ---
16 --- Not connected --- ---
17 RC (115) Receive timing --- ---
18 --- Not connected --- ---
19 --- Not connected --- ---
20 DTR(108) Data terminal ready Input Green/Gray ring
21 --- Not connected --- ---
22 --- Not connected --- ---
23 --- Not connected --- ---
24 TMC (113) DTE timing Input Blue
25 --- Not connected --- ---

A- 3 4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

The following figure identifies the 9-pin D-type male connector pins, as seen
when looking into the connector. The following tables list the pin assignment
for a typical connector in asynchronous with controls mode and transparent
without controls mode. These tables also list the color of the wire connected to
the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for connecting
between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.

Figure A-15: 9-pin D-type male connector, pin identification

Table A-22: ICP_V24 asynchronous V.24 9-pin D-type connector, pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 DCD(109) Data carrier detect Output Blue/White ring
2 SD (103) Transmit data Input White/Blue ring
3 RD (104) Receive data Output Orange/White
ring
4 DTR(108) Data terminal ready Input White/Orange
ring
5 GND Signal ground --- White/Green
ring
6 DSR(107) Data set ready Output Green/White
ring
7 CTS (106) Clear to send Output Brown/White
ring
8 RTS (105) Request to send Input White/Brown
ring
9 --- Not connected --- ---

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 3 5


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table A-23: ICP_V24 transparent V.24 9-pin D-type connector, pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


1 --- Not connected --- ---
2 SD (103) Transmit data Input Brown
3 RD (104) Receive data Output Brown/Black
B --- Not connected --- ---
5 GND Receive data --- Red
6 --- Not connected --- ---
7 --- Not connected --- ---
8 --- Not connected --- ---
9 --- Not connected --- ---

I CP_ V3 5 Conn e ct ion D a t a


V.35 interfaces in the SM_V35E are always in DCE mode. One ICP_V35 can
serve a single SM_V35E module. There are two M34 female connectors for
external interfaces on the front panel of the ICP_V35.
The following figure identifies the M34 female connector pins, as seen when
looking into the connector. The following table lists the connector pin
assignment for a typical connector. This table also lists the color of the wire
connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecom for
connecting between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.

Figure A-16: M34 female connector, pin identification

A- 3 6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Con n e ct ion D a t a
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Table A-24: ICP_V35 M34 female connector, pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction Wire color


A CGND(101) Case ground --- Brown
B GND(102) Signal ground --- Brown/Gray ring
C RTS (105) Request to send Input Red
D CTS (106) Clear to send Output Red/Gray ring
E DSR(107) Data set ready Output Orange
F DCD(109) Data carrier detect Output Orange/Gray ring
H DTR(108) Data terminal ready Input Yellow
P TD+(103a) Transmit data + Input Green
S TD-(103b) Transmit data - Input Green/Gray ring
R RD+(104a) Receive data + Output Blue
T RD-(104b) Receive data - Output Blue/Gray ring
U TMC+(113a) Terminal clock + Input Violet
W TMC-(113b) Terminal clock - Input Violet/Gray ring
V RC+ (115a) Receive clock + Output White
X RC- (115b) Receive clock - Output White/Gray ring
Y TC+(114a) Transmit clock + Output Pink
AA TC-(114b) Transmit clock - Output Pink/Gray ring

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y A- 3 7


Con n e ct ion D a t a BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

A- 3 8 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


B
Ra ck I n st a lla t ion

I n this appendix:
Installing Equipment Racks ............................................................................ B-1
19" Rack Installation ...................................................................................... B-6

I nst a llin g Equipm e nt Ra ck s


NOTE: The instructions in this Appendix are relevant to the
installation of all rack types. However, it is recommended that
BG-20 shelves be installed in ETSI A racks.

Rack Floor Marking


You need to mark out the rack floor plan before installing the rack.

Be for e you st a r t :
Before starting, find the prescribed location of each equipment rack.
If you have not yet unpacked the rack and the associated mounting kits, do so
now (see Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection (on page 3-5)).

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y B- 1


Ra ck I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

To m a r k out t he r a ck floor pla n:


1. For each rack, mark out the floor at the rack location(s) according to the
floor plan template corresponding to the type of rack being installed:
 ETSI A and ETSI B racks: Use template of diagram a. in the figure
"Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden
Floors (on page B-3)).
 23” rack: Use template of diagram a. in the figure "Mounting diagrams
for 19” and 23” racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (on page
B-3)).
 19” rack: Use template of diagram b. in the figure "Mounting diagrams
for 19” and 23” racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (on page
B-3)).
The marked locations are a helpful guide for positioning the racks.

2. If the installation is located at a site with a floating (suspended) floor, also


mark out all cable entry slots.
3. For concrete or wooden floors, mark out all the points designated for
equipment bolting.

Rack I nstallation on Concrete Floors


This section describes how to install racks on concrete floors.

To m ount t he r a ck on a concr e t e floor :


1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template. See diagram a. in the figure "Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks",
and diagram a. or b. in the figure "Mounting diagrams for 19” and 23”
racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (on page B-3)).
2. Insert expansion shields into the holes.
3. Position the rack over the mounting holes.
4. Secure the rack to the floor with the bolts supplied in the mounting kit, in
accordance with diagram b. or diagram c. in the figure "Mounting diagrams
for 19” and 23” racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors (on page
B-3)).

B- 2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Ra ck I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Rack I nstallation on W ooden Floors


This section describes how to install racks on wooden floors.

To m ount t he r a ck on a w oode n floor :


1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template (see the following figures), using a 5 mm drill bit.
2. Position the rack over the mounting holes.
3. Secure the rack to the floor using the appropriate wood screws (see the
following figures).

Figure B-1: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y B- 3


Ra ck I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Figure B-2: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks

B- 4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Ra ck I n st a lla t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Rack I nstallation on Floating ( Suspended)


Floors
This section describes how to install racks on floating (suspended) floors.

To m ount t he r a ck on a floa t ing ( suspe nde d) floor :


1. Drill the required mounting holes in the suspended floor, in accordance
with the appropriate template.
2. Position the rack over the mounting holes.
3. Secure the rack to the floor in accordance with diagram c. in the figure
"Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks" (Rack Installation on Wooden Floors
(on page B-3)).

Suspended Overhead Tray Assem bly


This section describes how to install racks on a suspended overhead tray.

To m ount t he r a ck on a suspe nde d ove r he a d t r a y:


1. Refer to the suspended overhead tray diagram (see the following figure)
and position the overhead rack securing brackets.
2. Secure the rack to the overhead cabling trays, using the adjustable brackets.
2200 mm high racks may also be attached to the ceiling; 2600 mm racks
are generally attached only to the ceiling.

Figure B-3: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead


tray (2200 mm rack)

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y B- 5


Ra ck I n st a lla t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

I nstalling Extendable Rails


In high-density installations, it may be necessary to install the xRAP above the
rack using the extendable installation rails available from ECI Telecom.
In this case, attach the extendable installation rails to the top of the rack before
installing the equipment.

Rack Grounding
Immediately after installing the rack, connect its grounding stud to the
prescribed grounding point on the site grounding bar.
Use a grounding lead that meets the requirements described in Rack Grounding
Requirements.

1 9 " Ra ck I n st a lla t ion


The BG-20 can also be installed in European 19” racks. This is accepted under
the limitations that the rack’s general dimensions are according to the following
figure. Any other European 19” rack must first be examined and approved by
ECI Telecom.

Figure B-4: Example of an approved European 19” rack

B- 6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


C
Lice n se Act iva t ion

I n this appendix:
BG-20 Licensing Scheme ............................................................................... C-1
Selecting the Proper BG-20 for Each Site ...................................................... C-3
Activating Licenses ........................................................................................ C-4

BG- 2 0 Lice nsing Sche m e


The BG-20B supports ADM-4 and six FE interfaces, thereby accommodating a
real pay-as-you-grow solution based on required services. New services, such
as ADM-4 and FE interfaces, can be implemented where and when required
after appropriate license activation. By using the license-based solution,
carriers can benefit from:
 CAPEX savings: pay according to the required functionality and capacity
 A future-proof solution: the ability to add functions, capacity, and
interfaces when and where required, just by upgrading licenses
The following are some basic concepts that apply to BG-20 licensing:
 The license fee concept is NE-based. This means that the carrier buys the
licenses for a specific NE connected to a specific EMS-BGF, based on a
serial number.
 The license is stored in the EMS-BGF or LCT-BGF and is activated in the
NE according to its serial number. This means that the EMS-BGF or
LCT-BGF searches its managed network for the NE with the appropriate
serial number, in order to activate its license.
 The license policy is enforced both in the EMS-BGF or LCT-BGF, as well
as in the BG-20 NE embedded software.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y C- 1


Lice n se Act iva t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

 The BG-20 NE prevents the creation of any Ethernet service through FE


interfaces on the MXC20 or the implementation of STM-4 ADM until the
license is activated. An appropriate license must be purchased by the
customer to be able to use the following features:
 BG-20B activation as an ADM-4
 First-time activation of or increasing the number of Ethernet ports on
the BG-20B
 BG-20B upgrade from ADM-1 to ADM-4
 The license key cannot be moved from one NE to another.
 The license can only be updated upwards, which means that an ADM-4
cannot be changed to an ADM-1 by issuing a new license. This requires a
special process for deleting an activated license key.
 There is no limitation for using a BG-20 with a high-level license key for
lower-level requirements. For example, a BG-20 NE with a license for
ADM-4 and 4 x FE ports can be installed and used as an ADM-1 without
Ethernet services, just by plugging in the appropriate SFPs. Later, the NE
can be upgraded to the appropriate license key level.
 License activation is not traffic-affecting.

NOTE: The OMS4B always provides one STM-4 interface,


and no license is needed.
All GbE and FE interfaces on the ESW_2G_8F_E are always
activated. No license is needed to activate these interfaces.

C- 2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Lice n se Act iva t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Se le ct in g t he Pr ope r BG- 2 0 for


Ea ch Sit e
Because the license is based on the NE serial number and cannot be moved
from one NE to another, during installation, you must select the proper BG-20
unit from your warehouse for each site you want to install. Although all BG-20
units have the same hardware, they may have different NE types, according to
the license purchased for each NE. For example, if you install a BG-20 with an
ADM-4 license in site A that only needs ADM-1 and you later need an ADM-4
license for site B, there may be only one BG-20 with an ADM-1 license in your
warehouse. In this case, you should either move the BG-20 in site A to site B,
or purchase another ADM-4 license for the BG-20 in your warehouse. Each of
these options has a cost. In order to help you identify the BG-20 license type,
each BG-20 shelf has a label on its package showing its license type, based on
the license you purchased for this unit before its delivery. The following figure
shows an example of a license label.

Figure C-1: BG-20 License Label

You can view the NE license type, ADM rate, and number of Ethernet ports on
the license label.

NOTE: The license type shown on an NE’s license label is


based on the license purchased for this BG-20 before its
delivery. If you purchase additional licenses after this BG-20
is delivered, the license label on its package box may not be
correct. You must check the license type for each BG-20
using the NE serial number and the latest license list you
received after making your latest license order, in order to
ensure that all licenses are according to the latest order.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y C- 3


Lice n se Act iva t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Act iva t in g Lice n se s


All BG-20Bs are delivered with a default NE type, which is ADM-1 without
any FE interface activated. To upgrade a BG-20 to ADM-4 or to use any
number of FE interfaces on the MXC20, you must activate the appropriate
license for this BG-20, either during installation or any time thereafter when
you want to use these features.
After each license order, you will receive the following license files:
 A file on a CD that includes all the license keys, based on NE serial
numbers. The following CD requirements apply:
 A single CD is delivered with each order.
 The CD can be duplicated for distribution and loading to any number of
EMS-BGFs or LCT-BGFs.
 A printed list of the new licenses. This printout aids in identifying the
license type for each BG-20 according to its serial number and can be used
to manually input required licensing information into the LCT-BGF as part
of the license activation process or as part of an installation without a
loaded CD.
 A license label on each BG-20 shelf box. You will only receive this
information if you order the license for a BG-20 before its delivery. The
license label can help you identify the license type of each BG-20, and
enable you to manually input licensing information in the LCT-BGF or
during an installation without a loaded CD.
To upgrade BG-20 licenses, you should activate the license for each BG-20
through the EMS-BGF or LCT-BGF. The simplest way is to load each license
CD to all your EMS-BGFs and LCT-BGFs so that they always have the latest
license information for all your BG-20 units.
If you activate NE licenses using the EMS-BGF, the EMS-BGF automatically
searches all the BG-20 units that it manages and activates their licenses
according to the latest license information stored in the EMS-BGF.
If you activate NE licenses using the LCT-BGF, you should perform the
activation operation NE by NE. For each NE, the LCT-BGF finds the necessary
license information in its database and activates the NE’s license.

C- 4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d Lice n se Act iva t ion
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

If you have not loaded the latest license CD to your EMS-BGF or LCT-BGF,
you can manually input the license type and license key for each BG-20 during
license activation. In this case, locate the license type and license key for the
BG-20 whose license you want to activate using one of the following methods:
 From its license label on its packing box. Be sure that this license label
includes the latest license information.
 From the latest printed license list, according to its serial number.
 From an EMS-BGF on which the latest license CD has been loaded. The
EMS-BGF has a feature that enables you to view the latest license type and
key for each BG-20 unit by serial number.

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y C- 5


Lice n se Act iva t ion BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

C- 6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


I n de x
2 platform options • 1-2
platform overview • 1-1
2 Mbps Test • 4-7
power sources • 2-6
3 protection • 4-1
34 Mbps Test • 4-7 routing and connecting electrical
interface cables • 3-46
4
selecting for each site • C-3
45 Mbps Test • 4-7 typical installation • 2-9
A BG-20B
attaching in rack • 3-31
AC power • 2-14
BG-20E installation on • 3-36
AC Power Cables • 2-14
installation in rack • 3-29
AC_CONV_20B
power module installation • 3-32
connection data • A-3
shelf grounding • 3-31
AC_CONV_20E
BG-20E
connection data • A-3
extension cards installation • 3-39
Alarm Cables • 2-14
installation in rack • 3-35
Alarm-Handling Test • 4-13
installation on BG-20B • 3-36
Alarms
power module installation • 3-38
cable • 2-14
connection data • A-9 C
B Cables
alarm • 2-14
Before You Start • 2-1
connecting • 3-42
BG-20
connecting coaxial • 3-49
connecting fibers and cables • 3-42
connecting data interface cables to
connection data • A-1 Ethernet interfaces • 3-50
installation • 2-8 connecting timing cables • 3-55
integration with other equipment in connecting to AC power source • 3-44
one rack • 2-10
DC power • 2-12
licensing • C-1
electric traffic • 2-16
maintenance overview • 5-1
grounding • 2-12
operation • 4-1
management • 2-15
physical location • 2-5
orderwire • 2-15

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y I -1


I n de x BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

preparing • 2-11 ESW_2G_8F_E • A-22


RAP input power • 2-12 Ethernet • A-21
shelf power • 2-13 ICP_V24 • A-33
timing • 2-15 ICP_V35 • A-36
z_AC power • 2-14 ICP_VF • A-32
Cards INF_20B • A-3
checking installation in shelf • 4-3 INF_20E • A-3
replacing • 5-22 M345_3 • A-21
Cleaning Optical Connectors • 2-7 MNG Ethernet • A-4
Commissioning Tests • 4-1 orderwire • A-7
Connecting overview • A-2
coaxial cables • 3-49 P345_3E • A-21
data interface cables to Ethernet PE1_63 • A-21
interfaces • 3-50 RS-232 • A-6
E1cables for balanced E1 interfaces • SM_10E • A-22
3-46
SM_CODIR_4E • A-31
E1cables for unbalanced E1 interfaces
• 3-48 SM_EM_24W6E • A-24
electrical cables for ICPs • 3-51, 3-53 SM_FXO_8E • A-23
electrical cables for PCM interfaces to SM_FXS_8E • A-23
ICPs • 3-52 SM_V24E • A-26, A-27
electrical cables for PCM interfaces to timing • A-5
VDF • 3-51 V.11 overhead • A-8
electrical interface cables to BG-20 •
3-46 D
optical fibers to optical modules • Data Network Commissioning Tests •
3-45 4-15
orderwire cables • 3-56 DC power cables • 2-12
power and alarm cables to AC power Dslot Modules
source • 3-44 installation • 3-33
power and alarm cables to DC power replacing • 5-24
source • 3-42
timing cables • 3-55 E
Connection Data • A-1 E1
AC_CONV_20B • A-3 connection data on ME1_21/ME1_42
AC_CONV_20E • A-3 • A-15
alarms • A-9 connection data on MXC20 • A-11
E1 on MXC20 • A-11 Electric Traffic Cables • 2-16
E1on ME1_21/ME1_42 • A-15 Environmental Requirements • 2-5

I -2 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d I n de x
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

Equipment • 3-1 ICPs


Equipment Installation • 3-1 connecting electrical cables • 3-53
Equipment Power-on Test • 4-10 connecting electrical cables for PCM
Equipment Safety • 2-19 interfaces • 3-51
ESD replacing • 5-27
protection against • 2-25 INF_20B
Eslot connection data • A-3
replacing cards • 5-25 INF_20E
Ethernet connection data • A-3
connection data • A-21 Input Sensitivity test • 4-10
EWS_2G_8F_E Installation
connection data • A-22 ancillary units in racks • 3-8
installation • 3-40 BG-20 in racks • 2-8
BG-20B in rack • 3-29
F
BG-20B power modules • 3-32
Fiber Storage Tray BG-20E in rack • 3-35
installation • 3-20 BG-20E on the BG-20B • 3-36
Fibers BG-20E power modules • 3-38
connecting optical fibers to optical Dslot modules • 3-33
modules • 3-45
equipment racks • B-1
connecting to BG-20 • 3-42
extendable rails • B-6
optical • 2-18
extension cards in BG-20E • 3-39
preparing • 2-11
fiber storage tray • 3-20
Frame Loos-Rate Test • 4-16
integrating BG-20 and other
G equipment in one rack • 2-10
ODF • 3-21
Grounding Cables • 2-12
options • 3-6
Grounding Requirements • 2-20
overview • 3-1
rack • 2-20
plan • 2-8
I
preliminary preparations • 3-2
ICP_V24 racks • B-1
connection data • A-33 racks on concrete floors • B-2
ICP_V35 racks on floating floors • B-5
connection data • A-36 racks on wooden floors • B-3
ICP_VF rail stiffeners • 3-30
connection data • A-32 RAP-100 • 3-16
RAP-BG • 3-9

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y I -3


I n de x BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

sequence • 3-2 N
SM_10E ICPs • 3-27 Network Timing Synchronization Test •
traffic modules in SM_10E • 3-41 4-9
typical • 2-9
O
unpacking and visual inspection • 3-5
ODF
xDDF-21 patch panel • 3-25
installation • 3-21
z_19 • B-6
Operation • 4-1
L Optical Fibers • 2-18
Laser connecting • 3-45
classification • 2-21 Orderwire • 2-15
information • 2-23 cables • 2-15
operating precautions • 2-22 connecting cables • 3-56
safety requirements • 2-21 connection data • A-7
safety warning • 2-22
P
warning labels • 2-22
P345_3E
Licenses
connection data • A-21
activation • C-1, C-4
Path Protection and Nonretrieval Test •
selecting proper BG-20 for a site •
4-11
C-3
PE1_63
Loos of Signal Detection Test • 4-9
connection data • A-21
M Personnel Training • 2-26
M345_3 Physical Location of BG-20 • 2-5
connection data • A-21 Platform Options • 1-2
Maintenance • 5-1 Platform Overview • 1-1
preventive • 5-2 Power Cables
Maintenance Action Tests • 4-14 AC • 2-14
Management Cables • 2-15 DC • 2-12
Measuring Optical Levels • 4-5 shelf • 2-13
MNG Power Modules
connection data • A-4 replacing • 5-27
Modules Power Sources • 2-6
checking installation in shelf • 4-3 Power Supply Requirements • 2-21
replacing • 5-22 Preparing Cables and Fibers • 2-11
Preventive Maintenance • 5-2

I -4 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1


BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d I n de x
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

R S
Racks S1_4
floor marking • B-1 installation • 3-40
grounding • B-6 Safety • 2-19, 5-22
installation • B-1 laser • 2-21, 2-22
installation on concrete floors • B-2 SDH Commissioning Tests • 4-7
installation on floating floors • B-5 Severity Assignment Test • 4-12
installation on suspended overhead SFP Modules
tray • B-5 installation • 3-34
installation on wooden floors • B-3 installation in ESW_2G_8F_E • 3-40
Z_19 • B-6 installation in S1_4 • 3-40
Rail Stiffeners replacing • 5-28
installation • 3-30 Shelf Power-on Test • 4-6
RAP Site Commissioning Tests • 4-3
input power cables • 2-12 Site Preparation • 2-4
RAP-100 SM_10E
connecting BG-20B power cables • connection data • A-22
3-16
ICP installation • 3-27
connecting DC input power cables •
3-16 replacing ICPs • 5-27
installation • 3-16 replacing traffic modules • 5-26
installing circuit breakers • 3-16 traffic modules installation • 3-41
RAP-BG SM_CODIR_4E
installation • 3-9 connection data • A-31
Replacing SM_EM_24W6E
cards and modules • 5-22 connection data • A-24
Dslot modules • 5-24 SM_FXO_8E
Eslot cards • 5-25 connection data • A-23
ICPs • 5-27 SM_FXS_8E
power modules • 5-27 connection data • A-23
SFP modules • 5-28 SM_V24E
traffic modules on SM_10E • 5-26 connection data • A-27
Routing SM_V35E
electrical interface cables to BG-20 • connection data • A-26
3-46 Stability Test • 4-11
RS-232
connection data • A-6

4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y I -5


I n de x BG- 2 0 I n st a lla t ion , Ope r a t ion , a n d
M a in t e n a n ce M a n u a l

T
Temporary EPA • 2-27
work arrangements • 2-28
Tests
alarm handling • 4-13
commissioning • 4-1
data network commissioning • 4-15
equipment • 2-7, 4-2
equipment power-on • 4-10
equipment setup • 4-7
Timing
cables • 2-15
connecting cables • 3-55
connection data • A-6
Timing (clock ) Cables • 2-15
U
Unpacking and Visual Inspection • 3-5
V
V.11 Overhead
connection data • A-8
Visual Inspection • 4-4
X
xDDF-21
installation • 3-25

I -6 ECI Te le com Lt d. Pr opr ie t a r y 4 2 6 0 0 6 - 2 3 2 8 - 0 1 3 - A0 1

You might also like